Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
8th Edition
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and
registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in
particular reproduction or making available to third parties without our explicit
consent in writing is prohibited.
The use is only allowed for the purpose laid down in the contract.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this
the reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a
warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our
customers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep
them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrep-
ancies between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
Version 7.50
1. Introduction E
2. Safety instructions A
3. Basic concept F
7. Commissioning C
9. Fault-finding D
13. Appendices E
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
1. INTRODUCTION
1-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. REB500/REB500sys
The digital busbar system REB500 belongs to the generation of
fully digital protection devices, i.e. the analog-to-digital
conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after
the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting
digital signals is performed by programmable microprocessors.
Its development was based on the established analog electronic
busbar protection schemes INX2 and INX5.
The main features which enable the REB500 to fully satisfy the
demands placed on a modern protective device with respect to
cost-effectiveness and functionality are compact design, just a
few different types of hardware units, modular software and
continuous self-supervision and diagnosis.
The structure of the protection system is bay-oriented. The bay
units may be located close to the switchgear in control and
protection cubicles or in a central relay room. Distributed bay
units are connected to the central unit by an optical fiber process
bus. The central unit collects all the data and executes the
protection algorithms and auxiliary functions at station level.
The standard application of the REB500 protection system is
that of busbar protection. Provision is made, however for
integrating optional functions to detect, for example, breaker
failure, end zone faults, overcurrent and circuit-breaker pole
discrepancy.
The version REB500sys also includes bay protection functions
for all power systems voltages and types of grounding in stations
with single and double busbars.
1.2. Application
The digital busbar protection REB500 has been designed for the
high-speed selective protection of MV, HV and EHV busbars in
50 and 60 Hz power systems and also for railway systems
operating at 16.7 Hz. Because of the flexible and modular
structure of both hardware and software, the protection can be
simply configured to suit the particular busbar arrangement.
1-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
1-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
1.4. Options
Breaker failure protection
End zone fault protection
Time-overcurrent protection
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection
Voltage-measuring disturbance recorder
Separate I0 measurement for impedance grounded systems
1-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
1-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
1-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
1-7
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
January 05
2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
2-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
2-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
3. BASIC CONCEPT
3-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3. BASIC CONCEPT
3-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
I
II
I
II
Transfer
busbar
3-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
II
3-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Link to the
central unit
Optional
redundant Auxiliary supply
auxiliary supply
Fig. 3.8 Rear view of bay unit (example for 500BU03, i.e.
4 x I and 5 x U measurements and redundant
supplies)
3-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
+R1
Terminal block 1
+1U CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 2
1-3 BU03 BU03 BU03 +5U CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 3
CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 5
CT/VT Trip Signal
Air
vent
Terminal block 6
CT/VT Trip Signal
4-6 BU03 BU03 BU03 +22U
Terminal block 7
CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 8
BU03 BU03 BU03 +30U CT/VT Trip Signal
7-9
Terminal block 9
CT/VT Trip Signal
3-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
REB500-
Central unit
AB B Ne tw ork Part n er AG REB 50 0
AB B Ne tw o rk Pa rt n er AG REB 500
REL REL
ABB N etw or k Pa rt ne r AG REB 5 00
C
C C
E
E E
Ce nt ral Un it
Bay Un it
Ba y Unit
REB500- REB500-
Bay unit Bay unit
Feeder Feeder
protection protection
HEST 005022 C
3-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.2.4. Standards
Refer to Chapter 12 for standard configurations of REB500sys.
3-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Redundancy:
When two 500PSM03 power supply units are operating in paral-
lel, their outputs are connected via diodes such that the supply to
the protection modules is maintained should one supply unit fail.
With the exception of the contacts, the power supply unit
500PSM03 does not require any maintenance.
3-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Pin Name
1 DCD
2 RTS
3 GND
4 TxD
5 RxD
6 GND
7 CTS
8 DTR
3-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
An adapter cable for RJ45 to DB9 can be ordered with the ABB
order number 1MRB380081R0001.
The Ethernet interface LAN1 can be optionally utilized for con-
necting the HMI500. This option is only available on the master
CPU.
Two LEDs are integrated in the Ethernet interfaces, and flicker to
indicate data transfer.
At the bottom there are four LEDs, which indicate data transfer
on the MVB segments. On the master and slave CPUs only the
LEDs for MVB1 are activated. On the bus controller LEDs are
provided for the two bus segments - MVB1 and MVB2.
Slot Nr. 3 Slot Nr. 5
500CPU05 500CPU05
Serial 1
Serial 1
GPS/Radio Clock 4800/9600/19200Baud 8N1
(Cannot be used in parallel with a Stationsbus.)
Serial 2
Serial 2
LAN 1
LAN 1
RES RES
MVB1 MVB1
MVB2 MVB2
Tx Rx Tx Rx
3-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
At the bottom four LEDs indicate data transfer on the MVB seg-
ments. They are not used in the current version.
Slot Nr. 19
500CIM06
Serial 1
IEC103 9600/19200Baud 8E1
(Can be only utilised if LON is configured.)
Serial 2
LON/IEC103
Stationsbus LON or IEC103 Tx/Rx
LAN 1
Stationsbus IEC61850-8-1 optical or electrical
(100Mbit)
LAN 1
LAN 2
Provided for redundant Stationsbus
IEC61850-8-1 optical or electrical
LAN 2
LON
RES
MVB1
MVB2
Tx Rx
Rack 2 CUB03
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Function PSM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - PSM
3-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
1
U1 [0]
2
I1[0]
A Rx
3
U2 I2[1A]
4
U2 [0]
5
C I2[5A]
6
I2[0]
U3
7
1
U3 [0] I3[1A]
8
2
9
9
3
I3[5A]
U4
10
10
4
U4 [0] I3[0]
11
11
5
12
12
I4[1A]
6
U5
13
13
7
U5 [0] I4[5A]
14
14
8
15
15
I4[0]
9
16
10
17
11
18
12
13
14
B
15
1
2
D
H
3
4
1
5
2
HMI
3
7
4
8
5
9
6
DC
10
7
11
8
12
9
I I
13
10
14
11
0 0
15
12
R P
16
13
+ +
17
14
1
18
- -
15
2
500BU03
5 2
CR08 3
6
OC13
CR09
4
7
OC14 CR10
5
8
OC15
9 6
10 7
CR11 8
11
OC16
CR12 9
12
OC17
CR13 10
13 HMI interface
OC18 H
14 11
15 12
16 CR14 Redundante
13
OC19 supply
Supply
CR15 14 R
17 1 + P 1 +
OC20
18 CR16 - -
15 2 2
3-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Process bus
Binary inputs Tx E
A 1 OL01
OC01
2 Rx
OC02
3
5
OC03 Binary outputs
6 1 C
OC04
7 CR01 2
8 3
9 4
OC05
10 CR02 5
OC06
11 6
12 7
13 CR03 8
OC07
14 9
OC08
15 10
CR04
16 11
CR05 12
17
OC09
18 13
CR06
B 1 14
OC10
CR07
15
2
OC11
3
OC12
4 1 D
5 2
CR08 3
6
OC13
CR09
4
7
OC14 CR10
5
8
OC15
9 6
10 7
CR11
11 8
OC16
CR12
12 9
OC17
CR13 10
13
OC18
14 11
15 12
16 CR14 13
OC19
17 CR15 14
OC20
18 CR16 15
3-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
CTs 4 9 8 6
VTs 5 0 1 3
Fig. 3.23 Fig. 3.24 Fig. 3.27 Fig. 3.28
VTs CTs
1
1 1 A terminal 1
5
U1 5 A terminal 2 I1
0 0
2 3
1
4 4
5
U2 5 I2
0 0
5 6
1
7 7
5
U3 8 I3
0 0
8 9
1
10 10
5
U4 11 I4
0 0
11 12
13
U5
0
14
Redundant
power supply Power supply
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
3-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
CTs CTs
1 1
1 1 A terminal 1
5 5
2 I4 5 A terminal 2 I1
0 0
3 3
1 1
4 4
5 5
5 I5 5 I2
0 0
6 6
1 1
7 7
5 5
8 I6 8 I3
0 0
9 9
1
10
5
11 I7
0
12
13
14 I8
15
16
17 I9
18
Redundant
power supply Power supply
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
13
14 I8
15
VT
16
U1
0
17
Redundant
Redundante
power supply Power supply
Speisung
Speisung
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
HEST 055 006V
3-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
CTs
Stromwandler CTs
Stromwandler
1 1
1 1 A terminal
Anschluss 1
5 5
2 I4 5 A terminal
Anschluss 2 I1
0 0
3 3
1 1
4 4
5 5
5 I5 5 I2
0 0
6 6
1 1
7 7
5 5
8 I6 8 I3
0 0
9 9
VTs
10
U1
0
11
13
U2
0
14
16
U3
0
17
Redundant
Redundante
power supply Power supply
Speisung
Speisung
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
HEST 055 007V
NOTE: A bay unit is dealt with as a single unit. Should one fail,
the entire bay unit is replaced and not individual modules.
3-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Optical interface
The entire protection system can be configured, settings made
or changed and its correct operation tested using a PC. The data
in this case is transferred via a serial interface connected to an
optical reader 500OCC02 fitted to the local HMI of a central or
bay unit. For this purpose, the corresponding HMI500 software
has to be installed on the PC (see Section 4).
3-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Modem link
The PC running HMI500 can also be coupled to the REB500
protection system over long distances using a modem (see Sec-
tion 11.13.).
3-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.4. Software
3-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
60 IN
40
I 20
-20
-40
0 10 20 30 40 ms
ta th t
to
Compensated current
Time t0 is the interval between the last zero crossing before the
maximum value is detected and the end of the prolongation pe-
riod. At a power system frequency of 50 Hz, this time is 12.5 ms
(at 60 Hz, 10.4 ms). The rise time from the zero crossing to the
maximum value is defined as ta. The difference between to and ta
is time th, which is then the time the maximum value in the sam-
pling window is prolonged. The longer time ta, the shorter the
maximum value is prolonged.
3-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Anti-bounce
filter time
The anti-bounce time for the special signals below is set to the
minimum of 2 ms instead of the standard time (normally 20 ms)
set generally for the system:
All disturbance recorder input signals 167nn_Start DR_x
and 36705_General Start DR
Breaker failure input signals 137nn_Start BFP_Lx and
13705_External Start BFP
31805_External release BB zone and 11605_External re-
lease Trip
The signals 1151011525_Supervison aux. voltage_x are
set to a fixed anti-bounce time of 10 ms.
3-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Function abbreviations
Busbar protection BBP
Breaker failure protection BFP
End fault protection EFP
Time-overcurrent protection OCDT
Disturbance recorder DR
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection PDF
Low-voltage check feature UV
3-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
1. Effect 2. Location
(e.g. Zone)
Output BFP TRIP Name category 3
1. Function 2. Effect
Output BBP Remote-TRIP Name category 4
A complete list and the definitions of all the signals are given in
Chapter 5.
3-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
SC 25 SYNC Synchrocheck
AR 79 AR Autoreclosure
LOGIC Logic
DELAY
3-42
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
The previously five digit numbers have been extended to six dig-
its for the bay protection signals. The protection function is rep-
resented by two digits.
A complete list and the definitions of all the signals are given in
Chapter 5.
3-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3.6. Self-supervision
To ensure the maximum possible reliability, the REB500 is
equipped with a self-supervision function, which enables it to re-
spond quickly to any hardware (HW) or software (SW) errors.
Some, such as an error in transmission via the process bus, only
affect a single data set and are generally of a transient nature. A
serious error would mean, for example, that reliable operation
could no longer be guaranteed. It is important to detect errors of
this kind and to take the appropriate action, which can include
blocking the protection functions and tripping outputs.
The self-supervision and diagnostic function ensures the high
availability of the busbar protection. Errors and defects are im-
mediately detected and signaled so that corrective action can be
taken without delay.
The self-supervision software forms part of the REBSYS system
software (see Section 3.4.1.).
3-44
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Higher levels
Enabling Status
signal
Status Enabling
signal
3-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
CT
supervision
Busbar replica
supervision
Plausibility check
Hardware supervision
Software supervision
Self-supervision/diagnostics
3-46
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-48
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-50
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Bay units not conducting any current (current < 0.075 x In)
3-52
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Example:
3-54
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3
6 7
1 IA IB 1
1 II A II B 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Protection zone
Protection zone
4 4 4
5
5 5
Feeder Bus-tie breaker Feeder
3-56
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-58
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.7.4.5. Delay
Isolators require a certain time to operated and while they are in
motion, the relationship between the status signals and therefore
the integrity of the isolator image may be briefly disturbed due to
the different points at which the auxiliary contacts are actuated.
As this is quite normal, an isolator alarm should not be gener-
ated and therefore the alarm has to be delayed.
3-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Q11
Q21
Q2 Q1 Q20 Q10
Q0
3-60
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
NOTE: If the isolator alarm is set due to the failure of the auxil-
iary supply for the return confirmation circuit (e.g. m.c.b. trip or
deliberately switched off for maintenance), it may be acknowl-
edged. Providing no switching operations are performed on the
feeder, a hazardous situation cannot arise because the last
status is retained for busbar protection (see Section 3.7.4.3.).
Delay
Isolator alarm
Switch inhibit
Protection blocked
(if safe)
Acknowledge
isolator alarm
3-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-62
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
29405_BP blocked
19205_Block BP
7) BP
23405_BFP blocked
23335_Trip by BFP
13205_Block BFP
BFP
23105_BFP TRIP
23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
24405_EFP blocked
14205_Block EFP
EFP 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
25405_OCDT blocked
15210_Block OCDT
OCDT 25105_OCDT TRIP
27405_PDF blocked
17205_Block PDF
PDF 27105_PDF TRIP
22405_BBP blocked
21110_TRIP
11205_Block SP BBP
11105_External TRIP
39205_Block BP
Currents
Intertrip
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
35220_Block OCDT
37205_Block PDF
HEST 985017 C
3-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Legend:
1. Default value 1 if the input or function is not configured.
2. The output is blocked when Block output relays is active
and signal 2) on HMI500 is configured for blocking.
3. Blocked by isolator or differential current alarm (providing
correspondingly configured via HMI500).
4. Protection function disabled.
5. CTs line side: transfer tripping
CTs busbar side: busbar intertripping
6. Detected automatically by the software when, for example,
the CB is bridged.
7. Blocking the bay protection does not block the protection
function itself, but only the logical outputs of the bay protec-
tion functions (see Section 12.1.), i.e. although blocked
measurements are still displayed and trips signaled.
An input can affect the output signal as follows (see Fig. 3.39
and Fig. 3.40):
B The signal is not changed (retained) providing it was configured
for blocking.
E The signal is not changed (retained).
F Signal enabled (trip interlocked by enabling signal).
K Blocks providing this blocking function were configured using
HMI500.
M Logic signal
P Partially blocked, i.e. the busbar protection does not issue any
tripping commands or signals. Other functions (BFP, EFP),
which can also set this output, are not affected by the blocking
signal.
S The signal is set.
Z The signal is either reset and blocked or simply blocked if it was
not already blocked when the blocking signal was generated.
3-64
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Input Output
Blocking inputs Alarms Enable
BU CU CU BU CU CU
35220_Block OCDT
32205_Block BBP
17205_Block PDF
37205_Block PDF
13205_Block BFP
14205_Block EFP
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
11205_Block SP
19205_Block BP
31205_Block SP
39205_Block BP
Isolator alarm
B E P Z F 41305_Trip BP zone
B 41310_Trip transferred
S B S 41405_SP blocked
B S 41505_Isolator alarm
B 41805_Alarm
B 41810_In service
B 41825_Inspection/maintenance
B S 41830_Switch inhibit
E B E F 42305_BBP trip
E B E F 42310_BBP trip L0
E B E F 42315_BBP trip L1
E B E F 42320_BBP trip L2
E B E F 42325_BBP trip L3
S B S K K 42405_BBP blocked
Z B Z F 43305_BFP trip t1
Z B Z F 43310_BFP trip t2
S S B S F 43405_BFP blocked
Z B Z F 44305_EFP trip
S S B S F 44405_EFP blocked
Z B Z F 45305_OCDT trip
S S B S F 45405_OCDT blocked
Z B Z F 45805_OCDT start
Z B Z F 47305_PDF trip
S S B S F 47405_PDF blocked
B 48805_Voltage criterion
S B S 49405_BP blocked
3-66
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Input Output
Blocking inputs Alarms Enable
BU CU CU BU CU BU
35220_Block OCDT
17205_Block PDF
32205_Block BBP
37205_Block PDF
13205_Block BFP
14205_Block EFP
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
11205_Block SP
19205_Block BP
31205_Block SP
39205_Block BP
Isolator alarm
Z B Z B 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
Z B Z Z B P P F Z 21110_TRIP
Z B Z Z B P Z P F Z 21115_REMOTE TRIP
Z B Z Z B P P F Z 21305_Trip
S B S S B 21405_SP blocked
S S 21410_Output relays blocked
B B 21805_In service
B B 21815_Inspection/maintenance
B S S B S Z 22405_BBP blocked
Z B Z Z B Z 23105_BFP TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 23305_BFP trip t1
Z B Z Z B Z 23310_BFP trip t2
Z B Z Z B Z 23315_BFP TRIP L1
Z B Z Z B Z 23320_BFP TRIP L2
Z B Z Z B Z 23325_BFP TRIP L3
B B 23330_Trip transferred
Z B Z Z B Z 23335_Trip by BFP
S B S S B S 23405_BFP blocked
Z B Z Z B Z 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 24305_EFP trip
S B S S B S 24405_EFP blocked
Z B Z Z B Z 25105_OCDT TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 25305_OCDT trip
S B S S B S 25405_OCDT blocked
B B 26805_DR ready
B B 26810_DR memory full
B B 26815_DR recording
B B 26820_DR record available
Z B Z Z B Z 27105_PDF TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 27305_PDF trip
S B S S B Z 27405_PDF blocked
B B 28805_Voltage criterion
B S B S 29405_BP blocked
3-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-68
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Synchronization by HMI500
The time is entered using HMI500. Accuracy can be increased
by using the one minute impulse rate.
3-70
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Inclusion of No
Restrained Restrained Restrained neutral current
amplitude amplitude amplitude permissible?
No No No
comparison comparison comparison
Yes
Internal fault? Internal fault? Internal fault?
Internal fault?
Yes
Phase Phase Phase
comparison No comparison No comparison No
Intertripping No fault
command detected
3-72
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Amplitude comparison
The differential current Idiff is the geometric sum of all the cur-
rents flowing towards and away from the busbar.
The differential current Idiff is calculated from the fundamental
components of the currents conducted by the feeders and the
bus-tie breakers.
N N
Idiff = [Re (ILn )] + j [Im (ILn )]
n=1 n=1
per protection zone
Restraint current
The stability factor k is derived from the restraint current Irstnt
which is the sum of the currents of the various feeders. The fol-
lowing is an example for the determination of the restraint cur-
rent Irstnt for phase L{L1, L2 L3}:
N
Irstnt = Re(ILn ) + j Im(ILn ) per protection zone
n=1
Idiff
[Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n=1 n=1
k= = N
per protection zone
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
where
k stability factor per protection zone
ILn fundamental component after the Fourier filter in
phase L of feeder n
N total number of feeders and bus-tie breakers per pro-
tection zone
3-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
The scheme detects and internal fault on the busbar when the
stability factor k exceeds the setting (typically 0.80) and the dif-
ferential current Idiff is greater than the setting for the restraint
current IKmin. The differential current in normal operation or dur-
ing a through-fault is close to zero. By including the restraint cur-
rent in the denominator the range for the stability factor k be-
comes 0 k 1.
Simplified example:
N N
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n=1
Ln
n=1
Ln
k = diff = N
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
5 + 5 10
I1 = 5 kA I2 = 5 kA k= =0
5 + 5 + 10
I3 = 10 kA
N N
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n=1
Ln
n=1
Ln
k = diff = N
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
5+5+0
k= =1
I1 = 5 kA I2 = 5 kA I3 = 0 kA 5 + 5 + 0
N N
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n=1
Ln
n=1
Ln
k = diff = N
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
I1 = 5 kA I2 = 5 kA
I3 = -2 kA 5+52
k= = 0.67
5 + 5 + 2
I1 + I2
I3
IDiff
3-74
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Operating characteristic
The following operating characteristic results:
3-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
I1 I2 I2
I1 Re
Operating characteristic
74 max = 74 I1 Re
I2 12 = 40
internal fault
0
Case 1 2
3-76
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Idiff
k=
Irestr
> kset & Trip
< set
HEST 005031 C
3-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-78
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
50
Operating 40
time
30
max. 30 ms
20 min. 20 ms
10
0 IDiff
1,2 5 10 20 30 40
IKmin
HEST 005032 C
3-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-80
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
t =21.9 - 29.9 ms
4 ms 4 ms
Central unit
t4=8 ms
IDiff
=10
IKmin
Bay unit
t2=8 ms t6=5 ms
3-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-82
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bus-tie breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
3-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Bus-tie breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
3-84
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.8.7.1.3. Short-circuiting of a CT
The bus-tie breaker is excluded from the measurement when
bus zones are also connected by an isolator, for example:
1. Coupled transversely by parallel isolators
2. Coupled longitudinally by parallel longitudinal isolators
Concerning 1. Coupled transversely by parallel isolators
The current flowing via the coupling between the busbars
(Fig. 3.53) is represented in the busbar protection by two current
vectors of opposite direct (V+, V-). The vectors are assigned
according to measuring system S1 (vector V+) and S2 (vector
V-).
When switching a feeder from busbar S1 to S2 (load switching),
both isolators Q1 and Q2 are closed for a certain time, i.e. bus-
bars S1 and S2 are directly connected.
During this time, measuring systems S1 and S2 are con-
nected to form one common measuring system (S1/S2) to
match the primary system.
For the same time the bus-tie breaker measurement is
blocked, i.e. the two vectors V+ and V- are excluded.
The reasons for blocking the bus-tie breaker measurement are
the following:
While the busbar sections are in parallel (Q1 and Q2 closed), the
current (Ik1) of any fault that occurs will divide into a part flowing
directly (Ik11) and a part flowing via the bus-tie breaker (Ik12). If
included, the bus-tie breaker current (Ik12) would be represented
by the two vectors with opposing directions (V+, V-) and as-
signed to the common measuring system (S1/S2). The conse-
quence would be that the
1. directional comparison of S1/S2 would prevent any tripping
because the opposition of the current vectors (V+, V-) does
not point to a fault on the busbars (see Section 3.8.2.2.).
2. restrained differential current measurement S1/S2 would see
a restraint current larger by double the bus-tie breaker cur-
rent and this would reduce the stabilization factor K to a value
lower than setting (see Section 3.8.2.1.).
3-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Ik11
S1
S2
Ik12
Q1 Q2
Ik12
Ik1
V+
V-
3-86
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3-88
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
3-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Bus-tie-breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
3-90
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bus-tie-breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
3-91
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
4-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.1. Introduction
HMI500 is the human/machine interface (HMI) for the protection
systems REB500 and REB500sys. For brevity, these Operating
Instructions refer simply to REB500 although the program
applies to both systems. There are additional menu items, which
only apply to REB500sys, and attention is explicitly drawn to
these.
HMI500 is a convenient human-machine interface which permits
the operator to view REB500 measurements and statuses, set
REB500 protection functions and configure the system,
download the latter data to REB500 and to control the
disturbance recorder and event memory integrated in the
system.
The data are transferred between the PC and REB500 via an
optical reader attached to the front of either central or bay units
and coupled to a serial interface on the PC.
4-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.3. Installation
The human-machine interface program HMI500 is supplied on
an installation CD.
4.3.2. Set-up
Administrator access rights are required for the installation of
HMI500 on PCs running the operating systems Windows NT,
Windows 2000 or Windows XP. An attempt to install the program
with lower access rights prompts an error message and the
installation is aborted. Contact your system administrator in this
case.
Insert the CD-ROM in the drive. The installation program is then
started automatically 1 .
Select the preferred language and confirm that the installation
procedure should be continued.
You are now requested to read and confirm your acceptance of
the license conditions.
1 Should the auto-start function on your PC be disabled, select and run the
program start.bat on the CD to start the installation program.
4-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4.3.2.2. Mouse
A mouse is necessary to work with the HMI500 efficiently. It is
possible to control it solely via the keyboard, but this can be a
little cumbersome. The right mouse button is also used for some
operations, and therefore it should not be configured to perform
other functions (e.g. double click).
4-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
NOTE: The database that was open during the last session
opens automatically. If no database was open before, select
'Open' in the 'File' menu and then the desired file. An error
message is displayed if an attempt is made to open an
incompatible file. An existing file in the protection system can
also be opened using the 'Upload' function in the 'File' menu.
4-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.50 7.50
OK
The new settings are saved in the database on the PC and the
dialog closes.
Apply
The new settings are saved in the database on the PC and the
dialog stays open.
4-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Restore
The changes that have been made are ignored and the old
settings restored. The dialog stays open.
Cancel
The new settings are not saved and the dialog closes.
Close
The window or dialog is closed and a warning is displayed, if
changes have been made which have not been saved.
In many dialogs with settings there is an overview tab for
selecting one of a list of bays and a details tab showing the
respective settings. Details can be viewed by either clicking on
the tab or double-clicking on the bay in the overview list.
File
The menu item 'File' permits databases to be opened and saved
and a database to be uploaded from the protection or
downloaded to it.
4-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
View
The menu item 'View' contains menu items for viewing the plant
diagram, the measurements of each protection zone, inputs and
outputs, switchgear statuses, the event list and any tripping that
has taken place. For REB500sys, the application also provides
facility for viewing the bay protection measurements.
Settings
By selecting the menu item 'Settings' it is possible to set the
system parameters, the operating values for the various
protection functions and the communication parameters.
Configuration
The menu item 'Configuration' concerns the definition of the
various circuit-breakers, isolators and CTs, the activation/
deactivation (masking/unmasking) of items of plant, the
configuration of system modules, tripping logics and the
disturbance recorder and maintenance instances presented.
Other items configured are the LEDs on the local HMI
(REB500sys, bay unit type 500BU03) and the optional GPS
synchronization system. In the case of REB500sys, an overview
of the licensed bay protection functions is also provided.
Testing
The menu item 'Test' is for enabling/disabling either the test or
installation mode.
Tools
Functions for editing data file versions, producing reports,
exporting SCS communication data, changing passwords,
selecting operator program options and setting the system time
are available under the menu item 'Tools'.
Help
The online help system and information details of the software
version are accessed by clicking on Help.
Status information is displayed on the bar at the bottom of the
main window (Simulation/On-line/Off-line, Edit/Read only, Test
mode, Installation mode, Database version, Setfile). These have
the following significance:
7.50
4-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
On-line/Off-line
If the program can successfully establish contact with the
protection system, it is in the on-line mode. If no connection can
be established or is not desired the program is in the off-line
mode.
Simulation
The system is in the simulation mode when 'Simulation' is
displayed on the status bar. All the functions can be executed
without being connected to a protection device. Random values
are generated when viewing protection unit data, e.g. event lists
or measurements. Simulated faults can also be viewed.
Edit/Read only
'Edit' permits settings to be saved in a file or downloaded to the
protection system. In the 'Read only' mode it is only possible to
read data.
Test mode
'Test mode' is displayed on the status line whenever the test
generator is activated.
Installation mode
'Installation mode' is displayed on the status line whenever the
installation mode is activated.
Database version
The version of the database structure of the database that is
open is displayed.
Setfile
The name and path of the setfile that is open are displayed at
this location on the status bar.
4-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.5. Operation
4.5.1. File
4-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Compare
The button 'Compare... ' starts the comparison operation.
4-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4.5.2. View
4-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Overview
4-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Detailed view
4-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
The binary inputs and outputs are listed in the overview dialog
together with their bay labels and slot numbers.
To view a signal status, select the corresponding module and
click on the 'Open status window' button or alternatively double
click on the module. Up to eight status windows can be open at
the same time. They can be arranged under each other by
clicking on the 'Arrange windows' button.
The display can be updated either manually by clicking on the
'Update status' button or automatically by clicking on the 'Update
cyclically' button. This updates all the status windows, which are
open at the same time.
A status window shows either the inputs or the outputs. A '1' in a
field indicates that the respective input or output is set and a '0'
that it is reset. The statuses of all valid values are green (gray on
a monochrome screen).
Two windows can be opened to view the inputs and outputs of a
bay at the same time.
4-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Overview
The number of records and the current status is displayed for
every bay unit:
Ready: The disturbance recorder is ready to make records.
Not ready: The disturbance recorder has to be restarted in
the detailed view of the bay (e.g. when the 'fix' mode of
recording is set and the memory is full, see Section 5.3.9.2.).
Recording: A record procedure is in progress.
Press 'Shift' and click on the desired fields to select several fields
at once.
Detailed views of all the bay units selected can be opened.
Recording can be initiated for each of the bay units selected.
The records of each of the bay units selected can be
transferred (see Fig. 4.20 'Transferring disturbance recorder
records')
The records of each of the bay units can be deleted.
4-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Detailed view
Dialog for viewing individual bay units and processing records.
4-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
The bay units licensed to include bay protection are listed in the
overview dialog.
To view the measurements, select a bay unit (highlighted) and
click on the 'Continue' button or more directly, simply double
click on the desired bay unit using the left mouse button.
The 'Select function' dialog with a list of bay protection functions
and measurements available in the particular bay unit appears.
Select the desired function either by double clicking on it or
selecting and clicking on the 'Open function' button.
The protection function measurement is automatically refreshed.
Close the dialog either by clicking on 'OK' or 'Cancel'.
4-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
The central unit event list has a maximum length of 1000 and the
bay units 100 records.
In the event of a supply failure, the events stored in the REB500
central unit remain intact for at least 24 hours.
Load events
The protection system has an event memory for every unit
(central unit and bay units).
To upload the latest events to the PC, open the 'View' menu and
select 'Event list'. This opens the 'Event list' dialog (HMI500 must
be in the on-line mode). Click on the 'Refresh' button to upload
the events. The protection system stores the events until they
are explicitly deleted.
The list viewed on the PC is refreshed either on command or
cyclically. To specify the refreshing interval, select 'Tools /
Settings' (see Section 4.5.6.5.).
4-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
Deleting events
An event is marked (becomes highlighted) by clicking on it, with
the mouse and several events by holding the mouse button
pressed and moving the pointer over them.
4-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Clicking in the blank field at the top left of the window (next to
Type) marks all the events in the list.
4-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4.5.3. Settings
4-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.5.4. Configuration
4-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.5.5. Testing
4-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
In order to set or reset binary inputs and outputs using the test
generator, it is necessary to open the 'Status of binary
inputs/outputs' dialog. Providing the test mode is active, the
status of an input or output can be changed by simply double-
clicking on it.
Regardless of whether they are logical '0' or logical '1', inputs
and outputs are normally green, those with impressed statuses
yellow and invalid ones red. Impressed statuses are green after
the display is refreshed.
4-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-42
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
Debug mode
In the debug mode, the protection system generates additional
internal program events. As a rule, the debug mode is only used
by the ABB engineering department for test purposes. In seldom
cases should the corrective action suggested in Chapter 9 not
prove successful, it is possible that a solution can be found using
the debug mode.
4-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4.5.6. Tools
4-44
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
In the case of the optional IEC 61850-8-1, LON and IEC 60870-
5-103 communication protocols, the 'Export' button creates files
that can be used to configure the communication interface at the
remote end.
HMI500 settings
Some of the operator program functions can be customized:
Communication
Communication can be established with a REB500 or
REB500sys system either via a serial interface or the TCP/IP
protocol. The input fields for the communication parameters
presented by the program depend on which of the two is chosen.
Serial interface:
In addition to defining the serial interface (COM port), there is
also a setting for the Baud rate.
4-46
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
TCP/IP winsock:
Settings are provided for the TCP/IP address and the TCP/IP
port of the REB system to which communication is being
established.
It is possible to change between the communication modes On-
line, Off-line and Simulation. Clicking on the 'Check Online'
button causes HMI500 to check whether communication with
REB500 system is active or can be established (see Section
4.3.2.1.).
Database locations
HMI500 creates a number of configuration databases. The
following dialog provides facility for defining the directories where
the databases are located and changing the database names.
Default directories are created during the installation of HMI500
and it is recommended that these not be changed.
4-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4-48
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
4.5.7. Window
When several windows are in use, this menu provides facility for
arranging them to overlap, under each other or next to each
other.
About
This provides information on the program version and the PC
system (available memory etc.).
4-50
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.8. De-installation
To de-install HMI500 open the Windows control panel and then
'Add/remove programs'. Find the entry for HMI500 in the list of
programs presented and select it and then click on OK to
remove the program.
4-51
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
5-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5.1. Introduction
HMI500 is the human-machine interface (HMI) for the protection
systems REB500 and REB500sys. For brevity, these operating
instructions refer simply to REB500 although the program ap-
plies to both systems. There are additional menu items, which
only apply to REB500sys, and attention is explicitly drawn to
these.
The REB500 busbar protection system is configured on the ba-
sis of the customers specification resulting from his response to
a questionnaire.
The following information is intended to enable the user to un-
derstand the choice of REB500 settings and to follow their calcu-
lation.
The basic configuration of the REB500 system is performed by
ABB. There are some additional settings that the user has to
make.
In this section, the various menus and submenus are explained
that require settings or the input of text by the user.
5-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Overview
The Overview tab opens a dialog with a list of all the isolators
in the single-line diagram with their labels and bay unit labels.
An isolator in a particular bay can be viewed by activating the
check box Feeder filter and selecting a bay from the list.
Details
5-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
The label in the Markings field of the Details dialog can be ed-
ited.
Overview
5-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Details
The label in the Label field can be edited and the reclaim time
for each circuit-breaker is entered in the corresponding field (see
setting instruction below).
5-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Overview
All the CTs shown in the single-line diagram are listed in this dia-
log.
Details
The label in the Markings field can be edited. The ratios in the
Transformer ratio fields are entered in terms of the primary and
secondary rated currents.
5-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Overview
The central unit and all the bay units are listed together with their
labels and type. The desired unit is selected by clicking the
mouse on it.
Details
The Details dialog shows the function and ABB reference for
every type of module. The node ID indicates the assignment of
the module on the process bus.
5-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bay unit
Central unit
The list for the central unit shows whether the modules are
masked or unmasked.
Refer to Section 3.3.2. Central unit modules for further informa-
tion.
5-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5.3.7.1. Overview
The overview tab opens a list with all the binary I/O modules for
which the following information is given:
ABB ref. (ABB designation for the bay or central unit)
Feeder (in which the bay unit is located, users label
for the bay)
Device (label)
Slot No. (module location in the bay or central unit)
Module type (designation).
These attributes cannot be changed.
5-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
The upper part of this dialog contains a general layout of the re-
spective module. The auxiliary supply voltage for each group of
optocouplers (with a common pole) is entered below this.
All the input signals assigned to the module are listed.
Deleting a signal
A signal is deleted by marking it in the window and clicking on
the Delete button.
5-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Details
Signal allocation
The Details dialog provides facility for allocating optocoupler
inputs to the logical input signals and the event memory of every
input/output module.
The abbreviations C.x and O.x denote the CLOSE and OPEN
auxiliary contacts on the isolator or circuit-breaker respectively
as they appear in the Details dialog. Where an isolator or a cir-
cuit-breaker is only equipped with a single auxiliary contact, the
One auxiliary contact mode must be selected.
This mode is not recommended because the status of the isola-
tor or circuit-breaker cannot be properly monitored with just one
auxiliary contact.
The signals are configured at the time the protection system is
engineered and are generally not changed subsequently.
Only the CLOSED signal field is visible when the One auxiliary
contact mode is selected. The function of the OPEN signal is
achieved by inverting the CLOSED signal. In this case, we rec-
ommend connecting the auxiliary contact supply to the corre-
sponding input so that its integrity is supervised.
5-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Inversion
The signals of optocoupler inputs can also be inverted.
Configuring events
Every signal can also be saved as an event in one or more event
memories (see Section 5.4.12. Event memory).
More check boxes and input fields appear when the Recording
radio button is selected. They determine whether the event is re-
corded on the positive or negative-going edge or on both edges.
The user can enter a text (up to 32 characters) defining the
event, but if none is entered the system assigns a default event
text. At least one event memory in the Send event to (= save
event in) field must also be selected either in the CU and/or BU
event memories. Furthermore, events can be assigned to the
event lists of interbay bus (IBB) 1 and/or 2.
New Signal
The New signal button opens a dialog with a list for selecting
and adding a new signal.
Clicking on the arrow to the right of the Signal type field opens
a list of available signals. The effective list depends on the func-
tions ordered by the user.
5-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11105_External TRIP
This signal is a tripping command received from another protec-
tion device (including one in the remote station) and is used for
the REB500 tripping contact to trip faults on a line or a power
transformer (see Section 11.17.5.).
11115_Ext_Test_TRIP
This binary input activates the signal 21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP
which to operate several tripping relays simultaneously.
5-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11205_Block SP
A signal applied to this input blocks the local station protection
functions (BFP, EFP, OCDT and PDF), External Trip, tripping
by the busbar protection and intertripping of the respective bay
unit.
11505_Close command CB
The circuit-breaker close command is needed by the busbar and
end fault protection functions in bus-tie breaker and configured
feeder bay units to control the REB500 measuring system (see
Section 3.8.7.).
5-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11530_Isolator/Breaker Position
The position of a circuit-breaker or an isolator is signaled by one
or two auxiliary contacts (see Section 3.7.4.).
11610_External reset
Tripping commands and signals can be configured to latch after
picking up, in which case they must be reset by applying a signal
to this input.
It also resets the text display and LEDs on the local control unit.
A reset signal resets the entire system.
5-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11655_Maintenance-Off
Anti-coincident maintenance input. Refer to the description for
the Inspection_x-Off signals. If the status of both inputs is iden-
tical, the LHMI on the bay unit indicates MaintenanceAlarm.
Refer to Section 11.12. Inspection and maintenance.
11660_Maintenance-On
This input is excited by the maintenance function. It is used
should only one maintenance signal be available. Refer to Chap-
ter 8 Operation and maintenance for a detailed description of
the maintenance function.
Refer to Section 11.12. Inspection and maintenance.
11765_General Start DR
This signal is configured in the bay unit and together with the in-
put signal 36705_General Start DR from the central unit trig-
gers the disturbance recorder in the bay unit. Without this signal,
the bay unit does not respond to a general start of the distur-
bance recorder.
It is only used for interlocking the general start signal for the dis-
turbance recorder and may not be configured onto an optocou-
pler input. This is achieved by setting the mode to No auxiliary
contact after opening the dialog Binary module and clicking on
the tabs Inputs and Details (see Fig. 5.14).
1184011885_GP_In_x
With a properly configured event configuration, the input signal
can be transmitted via LON or IEC103 and displayed on the con-
trol system. It is also possible to display the state of the signal on
the local HMI LEDs of the bay unit.
5-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
13205_Block BFP
The operation of the breaker failure protection is blocked for the
corresponding bay unit. When the blocking signal is cancelled,
the timers start again at t = 0.
13605_Trip transferred
The circuit-breaker sets this input when it cannot open, for ex-
ample, because the air pressure is too low or there is a leak in
the case of GIS (Alarm Stage 3 - Circuit-breaker blocked).
A tripping signal is then transferred to the adjacent breakers
(busbar trip) and possibly the remote station (see Section
11.1.3.2.).
5-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
13770...13780_Start BFP Lp
Breaker failure protection with phase-selective starting (p = 1, 2
or 3). The breaker failure protection timer starts when this signal
is activated by feeder protection function and the BFP measures
a current in the corresponding phase.
This signal is directly activated by the feeder protection unit and
does not therefore appear as a binary input signal.
5-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
14205_Block EFP
The operation of the end fault protection is blocked for the corre-
sponding bay unit. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the
timers start again at t = 0.
15210_Block OCDT
The operation of the time-overcurrent function is blocked. When
the blocking signal is cancelled, the timer starts again at t = 0.
16705...16750_Start DR_x
The disturbance recorder function is started by an external signal
applied to one of these 10 inputs (x = 1 to 10), or they can be
simply used for recording purposes. The external signal may
come, for example, from the tripping contact of a bay protection
relay or the starting contact of a time-overcurrent relay. Opto-
couplers are configured for these inputs.
The signal 16750_Start DR_10 is also transferred to the central
unit where it initiates the general start of all disturbance record-
ers.
5-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
17205_Block PDF
The operation of the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection
is blocked. The timers start at t = 0 again when the input resets.
17710_Start PDF
Providing this input is configured, the circuit-breaker pole dis-
crepancy protection is started or enabled by an external signal
(see Section 11.4.).
19205_Block BP
The protection output signals of the respective bay unit are
blocked. (Internal processing of the functions continues and
therefore measurements and signals continue to be displayed on
the local HMI.)
19600_Activation BP ParSet_1
The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set
1 are active.
They remain active after the signal has been reset.
19605_Activation BP ParSet_2
The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set
2 are active.
They remain active after the signal has been reset.
19610_Activation BP ParSet_3
The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set
3 are active.
They remain active after the signal has been reset.
5-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
19615_Activation BP ParSet_4
The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set
4 are active.
They remain active after the signal has been reset.
31205_Block SP
The station protection (SP) functions (BBP, BFP, EFP, OCDT
and PDF) including External Trip, External TRIP BB zone and
intertripping are blocked throughout the system.
5-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
31230_Block BB zone
With this signal of the bus bar protection the inter-tripping and
the external trip of the BB block is blocked. A maximum of 12
bus zones resp. blocking signals can be configured in one BIO
unit. A complete bus zone in which the BB block is located would
be blocked (inter-tripping). If the bus block is associated with an
isolator then it is also blocked (inter-tripping).
The input operates with a time delay of up to 300 ms.
31810_External reset
Tripping commands and signals can be configured to latch and
when they are, they are reset by a signal applied to this input.
The same signal also resets the LEDs (alarm and tripping). The
reset signal applies to the entire system.
5-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
3184031885_GP_In_x
With a properly configured event configuration, the input signal
can be transmitted via LON or IEC103 and displayed on the con-
trol system.
32205_Block BBP
The busbar protection function is blocked throughout the system.
5-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
The remaining signals and all the CU signals are control signals.
5-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Signal delay
Every output signal can be configured either to latch (until reset
by a signal) or to have a defined reset delay. A reset delay can
be entered in the field t and can be changed by clicking with
the mouse.
Relay output
The current signal is assigned to the output relays with checked
check boxes. Other signals of the same type (tripping command
or control signal) may also be assigned to the same relay.
Unavailable output relays (gray) already have signals of the
other type assigned to them. The remaining relays are available
for other signals.
Event configuration
The configuration of an output signal event is the same as for an
input signal event. An event is generated when the output signal
is set, respectively reset.
New signal
Same as for the binary inputs (see Section 5.3.7.3. Bay unit bi-
nary inputs).
Delete
Same as for the binary inputs (see Section 5.3.7.3. Bay unit bi-
nary inputs).
5-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
Tripping command generated by the external input 11105_EX-
TERNAL TRIP.
21110_TRIP
Tripping command generated by the station protection intertrip-
ping function (BBP, BFP t2 etc.).
21115_REMOTE TRIP
Any of the protection functions that are capable of tripping an en-
tire section of busbar (intertripping) can initiate a remote trip sig-
nal. Protection functions of this kind are:
Busbar protection
Breaker failure protection
End zone protection
The command EXTERNAL TRIP
Remote tripping can only take place if a fault cannot be cleared
by the circuit-breaker in the bay concerned. This applies in the
following cases:
1 breaker schemes (see Section 11.15.)
Bypass operation with the bus tie breaker being used for a
feeder (see Section 11.16.5.)
5-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP
This signal is used to generate a multi-pole trip for test purposes.
It is controlled by the binary input signal 11115_Ext_Test_TRIP.
21305_Trip
Signals tripping by the bay unit and can be set by any of the sta-
tion protection functions.
21405_SP blocked
Signals that the station protection functions including EXTER-
NAL TRIP and intertripping are blocked (either the bay con-
cerned or throughout the station).
21805_In service
Signal set by the diagnostic function that shows whether or not a
bay unit is operational and standing by.
21815_Inspection/maintenance
This signal appears when an inspection or maintenance input is
set in the bay unit and a position indicator on an isolator or cir-
cuit-breaker connected to the bay unit is forced into a particular
status.
Forcing of an isolator or circuit-breaker in this context means:
The item of switchgear changes either from CLOSED to OPEN
or from OPEN to CLOSED.
5-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
21820_Alarm
Signals an alarm situation in a bay unit. It is set in the following
cases:
An auxiliary supply fault is being signaled.
A bay unit diagnostic system has detected an analog signal
processing error.
22405_BBP blocked
Signals that the busbar protection function is blocked (either in-
dividual protection zones or the entire system).
23105_BFP TRIP
Trip generated by the breaker failure protection (after t1).
23305_BFP trip t1
Signals tripping by the breaker failure protection after time step 1.
23310_BFP trip t2
Signals tripping by the breaker failure protection after time step 2.
23315_BFP TRIP L1
Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on
phase L1 and has tripped.
23320_BFP TRIP L2
Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on
phase L2 and has tripped.
23325_BFP TRIP L3
Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on
phase L3 and has tripped.
5-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
23330_Trip transferred
Signals that tripping has been redirected, providing a signal is
being applied to the input 13605_Trip transferred.
23335_Trip by BFP
Signals that the breaker failure protection has issued an inter-
tripping command.
23405_BFP blocked
Signals that the breaker failure protection is blocked (either the
bay or the whole system).
24305_EFP trip
Signals that the end fault protection has tripped.
24405_EFP blocked
Signals that the end fault protection is blocked (either the bay or
the whole system).
25105_OCDT TRIP
Tripping command issued by the time-overcurrent function.
25305_OCDT Trip
Signals tripping by the time-overcurrent function.
25405_OCDT blocked
Signals that the time-overcurrent protection is blocked (either the
bay or the whole system).
26805_DR ready
Signals that the disturbance recorder is standing by.
5-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
26815_DR recording
Signals that the disturbance recorder is in the process of re-
cording.
27105_PDF TRIP
Tripping command by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy func-
tion.
27305_PDF trip
Signals tripping by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function.
27405_PDF blocked
Signals that the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function is
blocked (either the bay concerned or the entire system).
28805_Voltage criterion
Signals that the bay unit is measuring voltage below the setting
of the low-voltage criterion.
29405_BP blocked
Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are
blocked (either the bay concerned or throughout the system).
5-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
41310_Trip transferred
Signals that tripping has been redirected by the input
13605_Trip transferred on a bay unit.
5-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
41405_SP blocked
Signals that all the station protection functions including Exter-
nal TRIP, External TRIP BB zone and intertripping are blocked
throughout the system.
41505_Isolator alarm
This signal indicates that at least one isolator or circuit-breaker is
not reporting a defined position (neither CLOSED nor OPEN). It
is issued at the end of the set time delay and is reset by the input
Acknowledge isolator alarm, respectively set again by the next
isolator alarm (see Section 3.7.4.).
41805_Alarm
This signal is set in the following cases:
Supply failure
Failure or disturbance of a central unit module
Failure of the communication with a bay unit
Failure of a bay unit
Failure of a bay unit function
Error when refreshing the data in the protection system
Communication error in the central unit
Ext. superv. in service_1/2 inputs not set
41810_In service
Signal set by the diagnostic function that shows that the central
unit is operational or stand-by.
5-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
41825_Inspection/maintenance
Signals that an inspection or maintenance input is set on one of
the protection units.
41830_Switch inhibit
This signal appears together with Isolator alarm. No switching
of the primary system may take place as long as this signal is
active, because the image of the primary system in the pro-
tection would not then correspond to the actual situation (see
Section 3.7.4.).
42305_BBP trip
Signals that the busbar protection has tripped.
42310_BBP trip L0
Signals that a fault was detected on phase L0 and the busbar
protection has tripped.
5-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
42315_BBP trip L1
Signals that a fault was detected on phase L1 and the busbar
protection has tripped.
42320_BBP trip L2
Signals that a fault was detected on phase L2 and the busbar
protection has tripped.
42325_BBP trip L3
Signals that a fault was detected on phase L3 and the busbar
protection has tripped.
42405_BBP blocked
Signals that the busbar protection is blocked (either individual
protection zones or the entire system).
43305_BFP trip t1
Signals that the breaker failure protection tripped in time step 1.
43310_BFP trip t2
Signals that the breaker failure protection tripped in time step 2.
43405_BFP blocked
Signals that the breaker failure protection is blocked (either a
bay unit or the entire system).
44305_EFP trip
Signals that the end fault protection has tripped.
44405_EFP blocked
Signals that the end fault protection is blocked (either a bay unit
or the entire system).
5-42
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
45305_OCDT trip
Signals that the time-overcurrent protection has tripped.
45405_OCDT blocked
Signals that the time-overcurrent protection is blocked (either a
bay unit or the entire system).
45805_OCDT start
Signals that one of the feeder time-overcurrent functions has
picked up.
47305_PDF Trip
Signals tripping by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function.
47405_PDF blocked
Signals that the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function is
blocked (either individual bays or the entire system).
48805_Voltage criterion
Signals that the voltage release function has been activated (ei-
ther individual bays or throughout the system).
49405_BP blocked
Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are
blocked (either individual bays or throughout the system).
5-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-44
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.3.9.2. Recording
The following disturbance recorder settings can be made (see
Fig. 5.21 Disturbance recorder - Configuration):
Sampling frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz):
600/720 Hz, 1200/1440 Hz or 2400/2880 Hz.
The maximum recording time is automatically adjusted to
suit.
Number of records n
The maximum recording time available is divided by this set-
ting into n equal time periods.
For example, assuming 3 records have to be made and a
maximum recording time of 6 seconds, 3 records of 2 sec-
onds each can be recorded.
Acquisition time
This setting determines how much time before the triggering
point is included in the record.
The total recording time is at least 0.5 s. Of this, at least 0.2 s
are pre-event time and therefore at least 0.3 s post-event
time.
In the event of overflow
FIX
Recording stops. In this mode, the disturbance recorder is
stopped as soon as its memory is full. After the records
have been uploaded, the disturbance recorder has to be
started again manually.
FIFO
Overwrites the oldest record. In this mode, the oldest re-
cord is deleted to make room for new records as soon as
the DR memory is full.
This means that in this mode the number of records is re-
duced by one, i.e. for a setting of n=4 only three DR
events can be recorded.
5.3.9.3. Signals
All binary signals (input, output or internal signal) can be re-
corded. For this purpose, they must be configured for recording
and identified by their signal labels.
Up to 32 binary signals per bay can be selected for recording. Of
these, up to 12 can be configured to trigger the start of re-
cording. Triggering can take place on the lagging or leading
edge of a signal. If both edges is selected, both lagging and
5-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Trigger operation
Recording commences when at least one of the triggering condi-
tions is fulfilled. The trigger then remains disabled until the re-
cord has been completed and is then enabled again. You must
therefore set the recording period such that all the signals you
want to record can be recorded.
5-46
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-48
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
This opens a dialog with a list of the bay units with this feature.
The respective configuration dialog is opened by selecting the
desired bay unit with the left mouse button and then clicking on
Next or directly by simply double clicking on the bay unit. The
number of the LED on the local HMI is given in the ID column.
Delete signal
The assignment of a signal is cancelled by marking it in the dia-
log and clicking on Delete signal.
5-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Caption
The name in the Caption column proposed by the program can
be edited by selecting it with the mouse. A caption can have a
maximum of 20 characters.
Mode
The user can determine the response of the LED by clicking in
the Mode column.
5-50
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Settings menu
This menu accesses the system and protection function para-
meters and the corresponding setting instructions are given be-
low.
5-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
NOTE: The time delay must be set longer than the slowest iso-
lator operating time.
5-52
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-54
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
NOTE: The pick-up setting for the fault current (IKmin) must
be less (80%) than the lowest fault current that can occur on the
busbars (IKMS). There is a risk of the protection being too insen-
sitive at higher settings.
Providing the minimum fault current (IKMS) is high enough, IKmin
should be set higher than the maximum load current.
If the CTs saturate at the minimum fault current, the feeder cur-
rents have to be reduced by an empirically determined factor CR.
The corrected current values form the basis for calculating the
setting for IKmin. The reduction factor CR is calculated as follows:
For a power system time constant TN 120 ms:
IK
0.3 IN n'
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e
PN + PE
In both cases: n' = n
PB + PE
5-56
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Feeder 2:
Contribution to minimum fault current: 500 A
CTs: Ratio: 400 A/1 A
Class: 5P20
PB: 6 VA
PE: 8 VA
PN: 20 VA
20 VA + 8 VA
n' = 20 = 40
6 VA + 8 VA
500 A
0.3 400 A 40
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e = 0.95
5-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
IB IB
Bay 1 Bay 2
5-58
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
5-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
e) Summary
Considering case a), the pick-up setting for the fault current in
the example given must be:
IKmin > 2 kA
This is the only setting which will prevent tripping in the case of
a).
Both settings, k = 0.80 and IKmin > 1.7 kA prevent tripping in
case b).
A dangerous setting is impossible in case c).
Assuming a minimum fault current higher than 2.1 kA - see case
a), the settings for the above example become:
IKmin > 2.1 kA
k = 0.80
For a minimum fault current lower than 2.1 kA or even lower than
the maximum load current of 2 kA, the setting of IKmin can result
in both a failure of the protection to trip when it should or a false
trip:
With a setting of IKmin > 2 kA, the protection in the above ex-
ample would not detect a minimum fault current of 2 kA (ex-
cluding a CT fault).
With a setting of IKmin < 2 kA, a fault in the CT circuit accord-
ing to case a) would cause a false trip.
The best solution in this situation is to set IKmin to 80% of the
minimum fault current (IKMS).
5-60
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
a) Through current
Busbar fault
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 IR = IK IR
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IR = IK + IR
I I I
k= = K R
I IK + IR
The busbar protection will only trip providing the total fault cur-
rent (IK) exceeds a certain minimum:
IK 19 12.4 9 7 5.7 IR
5-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
b) Loop current
Busbar fault
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IQ IQ = IK
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IR = IK + IR
I IK
k= =
I IK + 2 IQ
The busbar protection will only trip providing the total fault cur-
rent (IK) exceeds a certain minimum:
IK 18 11.4 8 6 4.7 IQ
5-62
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
NOTE: The alarm should be set lower than the lowest load
current. A typical setting is 5%.
Table 5.7 Time delay setting range for the differential cur-
rent alarm
5-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
5-64
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Generally, one event is configured for every input and output, but
events can also be assigned to optocoupler inputs or relay out-
puts.
When a PC running the operator program is connected, events
can be uploaded from the protection to the PC. The events
stored in the central unit can only be read when connected to the
central unit and the events stored in bay units when connected
to either the central unit or the respective bay unit.
Events that are no longer needed in the PC can be deleted ei-
ther individually or collectively in marked groups.
5-65
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
January 05
6-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
6.1. General
The busbar protection equipment must be shipped, stored and
installed with the greatest care.
Install the cubicles such that there is adequate access from the
front and the rear for maintenance or additions.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the
requirements regarding place of installation and ambient condi-
tions given in Chapter 3. Basic concept.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the
equipment and terminated correctly and pay special attention to
grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines con-
tained in this section.
6-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
6-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
6-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.4. Erection
6-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
Fig. 6.1 Front view and view with the hinged equipment
frame swung out of a REB500 busbar protection
cubicle
4x18.5
B-100
300
T-100
600 8x18.5
101.5
HEST 035006 C
6-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5. Installation
Mechanical design
The RF impedance from the location of the various modules in
the cubicle to the cubicle ground must be low.
There must therefore be a good electrical contact between the
metal parts of the cubicle such as side plates, blanking plates
etc., and the frame and base of the cubicle. The contact surfaces
must not only be good electrical conductors, they must also be
corrosion-proof so that long-term good electrical conductivity is
preserved.
Non-observance of these conditions can result in the cubicle or
parts of it resonating at certain frequencies, which increase the
interference transmitted by the units in the cubicle and can lower
their immunity to electrical interference from outside.
6-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
Door or
hinged frame
Rack
Bay unit
Station ground
2
Copper braid, width 20 mm, cross-section 16 mm
Braid lug, i.e. good electrical connection
6-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
Cubicle
Station ground
The ground rails in the two cubicles are connected together and
each one individually connected to the station ground. The
ground rails of cubicles that are more than 1 m apart do not have
to be connected.
The cubicles of a suite of several cubicles are also connected
together and each one individually connected to the station
ground.
6-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
Mounting plate
Electrically
conducting
connection Electrically Electrically
on both conducting conducting
sides connection connection
Open
frame
Cover
Station ground
6-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
Both ends of the straps must be fitted with lugs suitable for the
connecting to ground bolts.
The surfaces in contact with the lugs must be electrically con-
ducting and corrosion-proof.
Copper braid Cable lug
Ground bolt
Contact surface
6-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
6.5.2. Wiring
6-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
CT leads
CT leads
Terminal blocks
6.5.3. Screening
6-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
Cable clamp
Cable insulation
Cores
Screen pushed
back over end
of insulation
6-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bare mounting
plate with bay unit
Equipment
frame
Cable screen
terminations
Screened
cables
Station ground
6-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
6-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
January 05
7. COMMISSIONING
7-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7.6. Configuring REB500 to match the layout of the primary plant 7-30
7.6.1. Introduction ............................................................................ 7-30
7.6.2. Procedure .............................................................................. 7-31
7.6.3. Adding a bay to an existing station ........................................ 7-32
7.6.3.1. Activating provisionally configured bays ................................ 7-32
7.6.3.2. Activating central unit modules .............................................. 7-33
7.6.4. Removing a bay from operation............................................. 7-34
7.6.4.1. Deactivating bays .................................................................. 7-34
7.6.4.2. Deactivating central unit modules .......................................... 7-35
7.6.5. Special cases when adding or decommissioning plant .......... 7-35
7.6.5.1. Deactivating (items of plant shorted)...................................... 7-35
7.6.5.2. Activating and deactivating individual items of plant .............. 7-36
7-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7. COMMISSIONING
7.1.2. Regulations
7-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
Check that the CTs are connected in strict accordance with the
diagram supplied.
Perform the following checks to establish the correctness of the
CTs and CT circuits:
7-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
Polarity
The test circuit is given in Fig. 7.1.
There must be a positive deflection on the voltmeter when the
switch (S) closed. The polarity must be checked at every protec-
tion unit.
This provisionally checks the CT circuit and confirms the polarity
of the CT.
S
+ P1 s1 +
Battery
(e.g. 4.5 V) V
P2 s2
HEST 005040 C
7-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
Protection
L1
L2
L3
L0
~
HEST 005041 C
Knee-point voltage
This requires the connection of an AC test voltage (HV!) to the
CT secondary and the measurement of current and voltage. The
primary winding must not be short-circuited.
The values recorded indicate whether the CT has a protection or
metering core. A protection core has a relatively high knee-point
voltage (the point at which a 10% reduction of voltage pro-
duces a 50% reduction of current).
7-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
Grounding
Every electrically insulated CT circuit must be grounded at one
point (of advantage is a point that is accessible during normal
operation).
Check that the VTs are connected in strict accordance with the
diagram supplied.
Perform the following checks to establish the correctness of the
VTs and VT circuits:
Polarity
This test is generally performed on the secondary windings.
Ratio
Measure the secondary voltage after switching on.
Grounding
Every electrically insulated VT circuit must be grounded at one
point (of advantage is a point that is accessible during normal
operation).
7-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
V1.50AB 03-11-03
Should this not be the case, follow the procedure given in
Chapter 9 Fault finding.
There should not be any alarms, assuming all the isolators and
return confirmation signals are properly connected and
energized (if not, see Section 7.5.2. 'Simulation of isolator and
circuit-breaker status signals').
Other operations require the connection of a PC (HMI500 pro-
gram) in order to be able to communicate with the protection
system.
Connecting the PC
The PC is connected to the central unit or bay unit by means of
the optical connecting cable supplied.
Minimum PC requirements
The PC operator program runs on an IBM PC or compatible
running MS Windows. The minimum PC requirements are
described in Section 4.3.1.
7-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
1A
1
5A
L3
L2
L1
IL1
2
N
3
1A
4
5A
IL2
5
N
6
1A
7
5A
IL3
8
N
9
1A
10
5A
IL0
11
N
12
HEST 025002 C
7-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
CB close command
HEST 005039 C
+
Isolators
During the closing operation of an isolator, the N/O contact must
already signal its closed status before the main contacts reach
their breakdown voltage.
Conversely, during the opening operation, the N/O contact
(CLOSED signal) should not open before the main contacts
have exceeded their breakdown voltage and it is impossible for
an arc to ignite. If this condition cannot be fulfilled, i.e. the N/O
7-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
contact signals that the isolator is open before it has reached its
breakdown voltage, the N/C contact must not close before the
main contact exceeds its breakdown voltage.
Circuit-breakers
In the case of a closed circuit-breaker, the auxiliary contact for
CLOSED simply has to signal CLOSED.
The auxiliary contact for OPEN simply has to signal OPEN
when the circuit-breaker is open.
The auxiliary contacts on a circuit-breaker do not have to take its
breakdown voltage into account (see Fig. 7.6).
The problem is therefore solved using the circuit-breaker
CLOSE command and an adjustable reclaim time (see Section
3.8.7.4.).
7-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
ABB principle:
Isolator
open closed open
1
0
1
closed
0
open 1
Current measurement 1
0
1
0
1
closed
0
1
open
0
Current measurement 1
(When both isolator position 0
inputs are inverted)
HEST 005042 C
Inverting the logic means that local events are generated while a
bay unit is starting that signal a change of input status that did
not take place. Correct operation is nevertheless unimpaired.
7-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
The tripping circuits are tested in the same way as the alarm
circuits by setting them appropriately in the test mode (the
operation of the test generator is described in Section 4.5.5.1.).
Set the HMI500 to the test mode by selecting Test mode from
the Testing menu.
Click on the Unblock all relays button in the test mode dialog.
In the test mode, select Binary input/output status in the View
menu to view the outputs of a binary module. The status of an
output can be changed by double-clicking on the corresponding
field, which then changes to yellow.
7-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
II
Primary
injection
test set
Reference feeder
II
Short-circuit CTs
Primary
injection
test set
Reference feeder
7-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
In order to carry out the test, all the amplitudes and directions of
the primary currents must be known. Perform one of the following:
Alternative a) Short-circuit the CTs and isolate them from the
protection.
Alternative b) Use the test mode to simulate that all the
isolators are open (this is the simpler method).
In the case of a), connect the infeeds one by one, or in the case
of b), simulate the closure of the isolators one by one. Whichever
method is chosen, check that the differential current increases
as each infeed is connected (either HMI500 or the local HMI in
the central unit). Repeat this procedure with the loads and the
differential current must reduce as each feeder is connected.
7-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7.6.1. Introduction
If the layout of the primary plant changes, the image of the
station in REB500 has to be reconfigured to suit.
The simplest way of achieving this is activating and deactivating
individual items of plant or groups of items using HMI500.
7-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.6.2. Procedure
The procedure for reconfiguring REB500 is as follows:
1. Activate or deactivate bays and items of plant to correspond
to the actual situation of the station (see Sections 7.6.3.,
7.6.4. and 7.6.5.).
2. Block REB500 by applying a signal to the input Block output
relays on the central unit.
3. If a bay unit has to be deactivated, it must be switched off
from this point on.
4. If modules have to be added to or removed from the central
unit, this has to be done now (see Section 8.5. Replacing
units).
5. Enter the HMI500 installation mode by selecting
Testing/Installation mode and delete the existing REB500
database by selecting Delete database in the protection
system. HMI500 then terminates automatically.
6. In can occur occasionally with CPU 04 that the installation
mode does not correctly delete the database. REB500
cannot then restart and the database has to be deleted a
second time using RebLoad (see Section 8.5.7. Delete
database).
7. Restart HMI500 when Load database appears on the local
HMI of the central unit.
7-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
7-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
Step 4
Check the analog inputs.
Refer to Sections 7.5.5. and 7.5.6.
Measuring the pick-up values of functions (e.g. distance
protection function) is unnecessary, because they are fully
processed by the software and any error would be detected by
the self-supervision function. However, it is normal to measure
the reactances of the various distance measuring zones. This
may be omitted if a suitable test set is not available.
Step 5
Check the binary inputs and outputs.
Refer to Sections 7.5.7., 7.5.8. and 7.5.9.
Step 6
Providing the auto-reclosure function is active, a complete auto-
reclosure cycle with the circuit-breaker should be carried out,
since it depends on various external signals (circuit-breaker
status, spring pressure etc.). The correct processing of these
signals can be verified using the test sequencer (see Chapter
12). An external current or voltage source is not necessary.
Step 7
Block the REB500 system (e.g. using Block output relays on
the central unit).
Step 8
Download the updated setfile to the central unit.
This requires that the PC running HMI500 be connected either
directly to the central unit or a bay unit, which is already
operational.
7-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
Step 9
Switch off the bay unit.
Connect the optical fiber cable going to the central unit.
Switch on the bay unit.
Step 10
Perform the busbar protection through-fault stability check (see
Section 7.5.11.).
Step 11
Check the direction of the distance protection function with
load current.
This is achieved by measuring real and apparent power in L1
phase.
The real and apparent power measurements of all the directional
functions can be viewed by selecting View/BP function
monitoring.
The direction Forwards or Backwards is also displayed for
both real and apparent power as soon as a valid measurement
has been made.
The display is influenced by the setting CT Neutral Line
side/Busbar side for the distance protection function.
The default setting of CT Neutral for the distance protection
function is CTs grounded on the busbar side.
Note the following with respect to busbar protection:
The side on which the CTs are grounded is of no consequence
for the busbar protection and does not therefore have a setting.
What is important, however, is that the grounding of all the CTs
on the busbars is the same (and have the same winding sense),
otherwise the differential current will not be correct.
Where this is not the case, the connections to the corresponding
CT inputs on the respective bay units must be reversed (current
phase-angle rotated by 180).
In the feeders in which the current direction has been rotated in
the bay unit by 180, the setting parameter 'CT Neutra' of the
distance function must also be respectively corrected to
corresspond to actual earting direction of the CT.
7-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
Step 12
Restore REB500 to normal operation.
7-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
August 05
8-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8.1. Introduction
REB500 includes continuous comprehensive self-supervision
and diagnosis of the software and hardware components. By
setting up a proper signaling scheme while commissioning the
system, most failures are signaled externally (see Section 7.5.9.
Checking the binary output signals). They can include internal
REB500 as well as external failures in primary and secondary
systems that influence the response of the protection. Other
failures that are not detected (e.g. interrupted tripping circuit) are
located and cleared while carrying out periodic inspection and
maintenance (see Section 8.4.). Checks and measurements
while the system is in normal operation (no active alarms) are
therefore unnecessary.
8-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8.2. Operation
8.2.1. Introduction
Operation in the case of the REB500 busbar protection system is
confined to supervising the proper function of the system and
assessing the system data.
There are different ways of viewing operating, disturbance and
tripping data:
local HMI (see Section 8.2.2.)
PC running HMI500 (see Chapter 4)
remote HMI (see Chapter 11)
station automation system (SCS) (see Chapter 11)
8-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
HEST 005025 C
Optical PC
interface
LEDs
Each LED can be on one of three conditions: not lit, flashing or
continuously lit. All the LEDs flash while the system is being
initialized.
Green
The green LED does not light before the system has
completed initialization and is standing by. If the green LED is
not lit or flashes, the device is either not switched on or
defective.
Yellow
The yellow LED flashes to signal an alarm condition (e.g.
differential current or isolator alarm). When a button is
pressed or a trip occurs while it is flashing, the LED changes
to being continuously lit.
Red
The red LED indicates a trip. It remains lit until reset by a
binary signal applied to the reset input or by selecting the
HMI Reset latching function.
20 LED signals
20 additional LEDs are provided on the local HMI, each of which
can be assigned to any output signal and configured to latch or
not latch as the case may be.
8-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
LCD
In the event of an alarm or a trip, the functions of the three LEDs
are shown on the top line and the other lines describe the event
that has occurred. The respective information is displayed
according to the location in the menu structure.
If none of the buttons are operated for about 10 minutes, the
display backlight switches of. It switches on again automatically
as soon as a button is pressed. The initial pressing of a button
while the backlight is off does not change the previous display.
Pushbuttons
The six pushbuttons are used primarily to navigate through the
menu structure. Any of them switches the display backlight on
again if it was switched off. If the backlight is switched on, any of
the buttons acknowledges the current HMI display.
Button E
Press button E to go to the next menu down.
Button C
Press button C to return to the main menu. If Reset
latching is the current menu, pressing this button resets
any relays that are latched.
Arrow buttons
The buttons marked and are for scrolling through
displays of information needing more than four lines.
The buttons marked and are for moving through the
menus item by item.
8-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
Trips
Reset
Latching
LEDs (500BU03 only)
Blocking (500BU03 only)
Central unit
Meas. var.
Bus zones
Bus zone 1
Diff. cur. alarm
Bus zone 2
Diff. cur. alarm
... (other bus zones as configured)
Inputs
Slot 16 (where fitted)
Slot 18 (where fitted)
Outputs
Slot 16 (where fitted)
Slot 18 (where fitted)
Global values
Settings
System response
Busbar protection
Phases
Neutral
Module check
Bay units
Bay unit 1
Meas. var.
Currents
Voltages
Inputs
Outputs
Circuit-breakers
Breaker designation
... (where configured)
Settings
BBP
BFP (where configured)
OCDT (where configured)
EFP (where configured)
PDF (where configured)
Bay unit 2
See bay unit 1
... (other bay units as configured)
8-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8.3. Maintenance
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
- The three LEDs CU: 41810_In service resets
or flash
CU start-up signals
8-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bay units
HMI text LEDs Event
- The three LEDs BU: 21805_In service resets
or flash
BU start-up signals
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Diff. cur. alarm Green lit, CU: 41815_Diff. current
yellow flashes until alarm active
button on the local
HMI pressed
8-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
Possible causes
The blocking of a protection function is due to either an active
optocoupler input or an internal alarm, e.g. differential current
alarm.
Corrective action
Corrective action is only necessary if blocking is unintentional. If
this is the case, check whether a voltage is being applied to an
optocoupler input, which would indicate a fault in the external
circuit. If the fault appears to be caused by an internal alarm,
check whether there is a corresponding display and correct the
cause of the alarm. Refer to the instructions for the
corresponding alarm in Section 8.3.1.1.
8-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Date Time Green lit, CU: 42305_BBP trip
Trip red lit CU: 42310_BBP trip L0
Feeder name CU: 42315_BBP trip L1
Bus zone * CU: 42320_BBP trip L2
CU: 42325_BBP trip L3
Date Time Green lit, CU: 43305_BFP trip t1
BFP trip t1/2 red lit CU: 43310_BFP trip t2
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: 44305_EFP trip
EFP trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: 45305_OCDT trip
OCDT trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: 47305_PDF trip
PDF trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
DIST trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
OCSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU None
OCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
DIROCDT trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
DIROCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
OVSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
DIREFGND trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
I0INV trip red lit
Feeder name
8-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
Bay units
HMI text LEDs Event
Date Time Green lit, BU: 21110_TRIP
BBP TRIP red lit BU: 21115_REMOTE TRIP
BU: 21305_Trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 23105_BFP TRIP
BFP trip t1/2 red lit BU: 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
BU: 23305_BFP trip t1
BU: 23310_BFP trip t2
BU: 23315_BFP TRIP L1
BU: 23320_BFP TRIP L2
BU: 23325_BFP TRIP L3
BU: 23335_Trip by BFP
Date Time Green lit, BU: 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
EFP trip red lit BU: 24305_EFP trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 25105_OCDT TRIP
OCDT trip red lit BU: 25305_OCDT trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 27105_PDF TRIP
PDF trip red lit BU: 27305_PDF trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 2111xx_DIST Trip CB x
DIST trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 212105_OCSTD TRIP
OCSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 213105_OCINV TRIP
OCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 214105_DIROCDT TRIP
DIROCDT trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 215305_DIROCINV TRIP
DIROCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
8-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
Central unit
8-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
Bay units
HMI text LEDs Event
Inspection Green lit, BU: 21815_Inspection/main-
Inspection number yellow flashes until tenance
button on the local
HMI pressed
Maintenance Green lit, BU: 21815_Inspection/main-
yellow flashes until tenance active
button on the local
HMI pressed
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Trip transferred Green lit, Depends on configuration
yellow flashes until
button on the local
HMI pressed
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Isol. alarm Green lit, CU: 41505_Isolator alarm
Feeder name yellow flashes until
CU: 41830_Switch inhibit
Isol. alarm button on the local
HMI pressed CU: 41820_Loss of supply
voltage
BU: 21810_Loss of supply
voltage
8-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8.4.1. General
Depending on the ambient conditions, we recommend removing
the dust (e.g. with a vacuum cleaner) and wiping the front of the
LCD with a damp cloth (perhaps with a little washing up liquid)
from time to time. Do not use petrol or cleaning agents
containing alcohol.
As explained in Section 8.1. REB500 includes continuous and
comprehensive self-supervision and diagnosis of the software
and hardware components. Since it is in the software that the
protection functions are computed, they do not require any
periodic maintenance.
The protection equipment, however, is only part of the overall
protection system, we recommend periodically checking all the
parts that are not automatically supervised (details of the self-
supervision routines are given in Section 3.6. Self-supervision).
The following components must be tested periodically:
all external circuits (e.g. tripping, BFP starting, CT and VT,
etc.)
all external switching devices (circuit-breakers and isolators)
all REB500 tripping and signaling contacts
all REB500 optocoupler inputs
all REB500 analog inputs
the local HMI
8-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
Conditions:
The isolator image auxiliary supply must not be switched off
for certain checks.
The feeder must not be grounded for certain checks.
The maintenance procedure must be gone through step by
step.
The feeder is isolated from the busbars during the test and
therefore cannot conduct power.
The maintenance procedure for a feeder connected to double
busbars is illustrated in Fig. 8.3 Steps of the feeder
maintenance procedure.
8-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
Compare the actual load current with the value in the Analog
input measurements dialogue (see Fig. 8.7 Checking the
signals at the analog inputs and Section 7.5.11.2.).
8-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
Conditions:
The isolator image auxiliary supply must not be switched off
for certain checks.
The bus-tie breaker circuit must not be grounded for certain
checks.
The maintenance procedure must be gone through step by
step.
The bus-tie breaker is isolated from the busbars during the
test and therefore cannot conduct power.
The maintenance procedure for a bus-tie breaker connected to
double busbars is illustrated in Fig. 8.15 Steps of the bus-tie
breaker maintenance procedure.
8-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8.5.1. Procedure
The best time to replace assemblies is when the station is out of
operation, but even in this case, care must be taken that no
unintentional operation of switchgear can take place (danger to
persons close to the item of plant).
While the station is in operation, care must be taken that the
station is still adequately protected when REB500 is switched
off.
8-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
Slot on
Module
backplane 500CUB03
500PSM03 1, 20
500CPU05 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 19
500SCM01 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18
500BIO01 16, 18
500CIM06 19
Procedure:
8-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
8-39
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
March 07
9. FAULT-FINDING
9-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9. FAULT-FINDING
9-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
Corrective action:
Step 1 See Code 102.
1004 TDB_Protocol_Error Possible causes:
1. Communication failure or internal SW
error.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the connections to the
protection system.
Step 2 Repeat the operation and consult
ABB should the problem persist.
9-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
9-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.2.5.3. 500SCM01
Code Description Possible causes and corrective action
9 10
9-21
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
January 05
10-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
10.2. Storage
The equipment may never be stored outdoors. The protection
cubicle and other components must be stored in a clean, dry,
closed room, which is not subject to wide fluctuations of
temperature.
The equipment packing is designed for a certain maximum
storage period. The original packing must be replaced or at least
the desiccate in the packing checked and replaced if necessary,
should the maximum storage period be exceeded. Special long-
term storage packing includes hygrometers, which are visible
through openings.
The permissible storage temperature range is 40 C to +85 C.
Refer to the general ABB documentation for detailed storage
instructions.
10-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
10.3. Decommissioning
CTs
Even when the whole station is switched off, CTs should never
be left open-circuit.
VTs
Even when the whole station is switched off, take care when
disconnecting VT circuits and insulate the connections.
10-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
10.3.4. Dismantling
The central unit and bay unit equipment racks and housings may
now be removed from the cubicles, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
10.4. Disposal
Observe local regulations concerning the disposal of electrical
waste.
We recommend removing the boards from the racks. The
housings and cubicles can then be disposed of as old iron and
only the boards as electrical waste.
10-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
11.5. Check zone protection for release of the busbar protection. 11-32
11.5.1. Function check zone protection ........................................... 11-32
11.5.2. Protection zones .................................................................. 11-32
11.5.3. Measurement principle......................................................... 11-32
11.5.4. Check zone.......................................................................... 11-34
11.5.5. Application of the Check zone protection (CzBBP) .............. 11-35
11.5.6. Substation configuration ...................................................... 11-36
11.5.7. Modification / Maintenance in connection with CzBBP ........ 11-37
11-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
HEST 025001 V
11-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Details
11-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
This setting may be too high for conventional iron core CTs be-
cause the measurement may not function correctly even at low
fault currents due to transient components in the fault current. A
failure of the breaker to operate will always be detected, but trip-
ping could be delayed.
n'
n* =
1 + 2 f TN
IE
current setting is n*
IN
0.8 IK min
b) Assuming n* > ,
IN
IE 0.8 IKmin
current setting is
IN IN
11-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Calculation example
CT data:
Ratio 600/5 A
Rated burden PN 15 VA
Losses PE 7 VA
Rated overcurrent factor n 20
Lead burden: 10 VA
Bay unit burden: <0.1 VA
Rated frequency f: 50 Hz
Power system time constant TN: 80 ms
Minimum fault current IKmin: 450 A
15 VA + 7 VA
n' = 20 = 25.88
10 VA + 7 VA
25.88
n* = = 0.99
1
1 + 2 50 0.08s
s
0.8 IK min 0.8 450 A
Since n* = 0.99 > = = 0. 6 ,
IN 600 A
IE 0.8 IK min
the setting becomes , i.e. IE = 0.5 IN
IN IN
11-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Fault incicence
Tripping command Successful trip
by main protection by main protection
Case 1: Trip
Ik
tm tCB tv t margin
BFP (t1) t1 ta1
tCB
BFP (t2)
11-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fault incidence
Tripping command Tripping command Successful backup
by main protection BFP t1 trip BFP t1
Ik
tm tCB tv tmargin
BFP (t1) t1 ta1 ta1
tCB
tCB tv tmargin
BFP (t2) t2
Ik
tm tCB tv tmargin Inter-
-
tripping
BFP (t1) t1 ta1 ta1
tCB
tCB tv tmargin
BFP (t2) t2 ta1 ta2
11-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Example
Example
11-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example
Maximum backup tripping time for a circuit-breaker operating time (tCB) of
40 ms
te tCB tv tmargin
t2max
Intertripping
t2max Max. intertripping time t2max = [te+t a1+ ta2]+ 2*(tCB + tv + tmargin)
Example:
Maximum intertripping time for a circuit-breaker operating time (tCB) of 40 ms
t2max = [te+ta1+ ta2]+ 2*(tCB + tv + tmargin) = 46 ms+ 2*(40 ms+19 ms+20 ms) =
204 ms.
Legend:
t1 Timer t1 Adjustable
t2 Timer t2 Adjustable
tm Operating time of main protection See main prot. data sheet
tCB CB operating time incl. arc extinction See CB data sheet
tv Overcurrent function reset time 19 ms
tmargin Safety margin (If an adequate safety >20 ms (ABB recommenda-
margin is not included, the correct op- tion)
eration of the breaker failure protection
cannot be guaranteed.)
ta1 Internal processing time of t1 stage 14 ms
11-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
t2max Max. intertripping time t2max = [te+t a1+ ta2] + (tCB + tv + tmargin)
11-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
CB "OPEN"
CLOSE auxiliary contact & 24305_EFP trip
coil
1)
IL2 > EFP setting 1
1)
IL3 > EFP setting
24405_EFP blocked
14205_Block EFP
EFP blocked
34215_Block EFP (CU) 44405_EFP blocked (CU)
2) The signal "EFP remote TRIP" is available for transfer tripping. Its duration
can be set using the operator program under Settings/System response.
Fig. 11.6 Block diagram of the end fault protection with the
current transformers on the line side
11-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
1)
IL1 > EFP setting
1)
IL2 > EFP setting 1 24305_EFP trip
1)
I L3 > EFP setting
44305_EFP trip (CU)
EFP timer
0 (36 ms)
24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
11530_Isolator/ Pick-up delay
&
Breaker
Position t 0 EFP intertrip
CB "OPEN"
CLOSE auxiliary contact &
coil
11505_Close
Command CB
24405_EFP blocked
CB close
command 14205_Block EFP
EFP blocked
34215_Block EFP (CU) 44405_EFP blocked (CU)
Fig. 11.7 Block diagram of the end fault protection with the
current transformers on the busbar side
11-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
) In case of local blocking of the protection function, i.e. on the bay unit, the
name(s) of the bay unit(s) are displayed.
11-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Details
The details view makes provision for activating and setting the
pick-up value and delay of the end fault protection for each bay.
(The pick-up delay is only of consequence when opening the cir-
cuit-breaker.)
11-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
I L1 < setting * RR
1)
I L2 < setting * RR & R
1)
I L3 < setting * RR
25405_OCDT blocked
15210_Block OCDT
OCDT blocked
35220_Block OCDT (CU) 45405_OCDT blocked (CU)
11-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
) In case of local blocking of the protection function, i.e. on the bay unit, the
name(s) of the bay unit(s) are displayed.
11-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
All bay and current transformer details are shown in the over-
view.
Details
11-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
PDF timer
Imax I < pdset * Imax 1
(greatest of t 0
I < pdset * Imax
I L1 , I L2 , I L3) &
47305_PDF Trip
&
17710_Start PDF 27105_PDF TRIP
&
Signal 17710_Start PDF configured?
1
27405_PDF blocked
17205_Block PDF
1 PDF blocked
37205_Block PDF
11-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
17710_Start PDF
R S T CB CLOSE signal
R S T CB OPEN signal
11-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
) In case of local blocking of the protection function, i.e. on the bay unit, the
name(s) of the bay unit(s) are displayed.
11-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Details
11-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
BB2
CzBBP Measurement
m m
IDiff = [Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n =1 n =1
of the check zone
m m
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n =1
Ln
n =1
Ln
k = Diff = m
of the check zone
IHalt
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
n =1
11-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
SS2
m m
IDiff
[Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n =1 n =1 1.5 kA + 2.0 kA 2.0 kA
k= = = = 0.27
IHalt m
1.5 kA + 2.0 kA + 2.0 kA
Re(I Ln ) + Im(ILn )
n =1
11-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Operating characteristic
This results in the following operating characteristic for CzBBP:
11-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
a) Trip CzBBP
Release signal from
b) Bay unit(s) in operation CzBBP
11-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
I
II
Transfer
busbar
11-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
+Ib
Ik = 2Ib
|Ik+Ib-Ib|
k=
|Ik+Ib|+|Ib|
Ik+Ib
k = 0,5
Ik
L1 L2 L3
HEST 985008 C
11-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Standard X X 1.5 s 3s 6s
Option 1 X X 6s 12 s 24 s
Option 2 X X 10 s 20 s 40 s
For the options 1 and 2, if the voltage signals are not recorded
then the maximum available recording time is doubled.
11-42
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Setting example
VT data:
UN primary = 220 kV / 3
UN secondary = 110 V / 3
Connection to REB500: 3 phases_star
Settings made in HMI500
VT connection: 3 phases_star
Primary voltage: 220,000 V
Secondary voltage: 100 V
Scaling factor: 1.1
11-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-44
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Undervoltage
The phase-to-neutral voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) are measured.
Overvoltage
The neutral voltage is either evaluated and is derived from the
three phase voltages (U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3) or is fed externally
(U0).
Detailed view also provides facility for setting the operating
voltage and activating or deactivating the function.
11-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-46
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11.9.1. VT assignment
11-48
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
I L1 I L1 >
I L2 I L2 >
1
I L3 I L3 > 21110_Trip
&
BBP trip
Although in the event of a busbar trip and feeder current not ex-
ceeding the pick-up of the low current check feature the feeder
concerned is not tripped, a trip event is generated by the central
unit and displayed on its (see Section 3.7.3. Intertripping/ trans-
fer tripping).
The current pick-up setting can also be used for trip redirection
regardless of whether the low current check feature is configured
or not (see Section 11.11.).
11-50
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Overview
Detailed view
11-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-52
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
default values
11-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Practical example 1:
BBP function tripping enabled by the an external under-
voltage relay
(see Fig. 11.29)
Problem:
In a solidly grounded power system, tripping by the BBP has to
be interlocked by an external undervoltage criterion. Every pro-
tection zone is correspondingly equipped with a VT and under-
voltage function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.30)
The enabling signals from the external undervoltage relays are
connected to the respective 31805_External release BB zone
input signal.
Sequence:
In the event of a fault on a given busbar section (e.g. BB1), the
busbar protection function for BB1 trips, but the tripping signal
has to wait for the enabling signal for BB1. A fault on a busbar
section will normally cause a voltage collapse, which is detected
by the external undervoltage relay for BB1. The undervoltage re-
lay thus also trips and transmits its enabling signal to REB500.
REB500 then trips all the feeders connected to busbar section 1.
11-54
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Practical example 2:
EFP function tripping enabled by the internal undervoltage
function
Problem:
In a solidly grounded power system, transfer tripping by the EFP
has to be interlocked by the internal undervoltage function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.32)
Sequence:
A fault between the open circuit-breaker and the CTs (end fault)
generally causes a voltage collapse which is detected by the in-
ternal undervoltage function. The undervoltage function thus also
trips and transmits its enabling signal to the EFP function in the
same bay unit, which sends a transfer tripping command to the
protection at the remote end of the line.
11-56
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Practical example 3:
BBP function tripping enabled by the internal undervoltage
function
(see Fig. 11.29 and practical example 1):
Problem:
In a solidly grounded power system, tripping by the BBP has to
be interlocked by the internal undervoltage criterion. Every pro-
tection zone is correspondingly equipped with a VT and under-
voltage function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.33)
Sequence:
In the event of a fault on a given busbar section (e.g. BB1), the
busbar protection function for BB1 trips. A fault on a busbar sec-
tion will normally cause a voltage collapse, which is detected by
the internal undervoltage function for BB1. The undervoltage
function thus also trips and transmits a signal to enable tripping
of BB1. REB500 then trips all the feeders connected to busbar
section 1.
11-58
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Practical example 4:
BBP function tripping enabled by the internal undervoltage
function without VTs on the busbars
(see Fig. 11.34)
Problem:
In a solidly grounded power system, tripping by the BBP has to
be interlocked by the internal undervoltage criterion, but there
are no VTs to measure the voltage on the busbars.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.33)
REB500 evaluates all the VTs assigned to the respective protec-
tion zone (see Section 11.9.). Assignment takes place via the in-
tertripping logic, i.e. it depends on the statuses of the isolators.
Tripping is only enabled when all the voltage functions assigned
to the protection zone in question generate an enabling signal
(AND logic).
This means that an overvoltage function cannot enable tripping
of the protection zone should the voltage be interrupted either
due to a tripped m.c.b. or an open-circuit.
This means that an undervoltage function will enable tripping
of the protection zone should the voltage be interrupted either
due to a tripped m.c.b. or an open-circuit. Since, however, the
other undervoltage functions assigned to the protection zone are
also evaluated, they prevent tripping from taking place.
11-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-60
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Practical example 5:
BBP neutral measuring system enabled by the internal un-
dervoltage function
(see Fig. 11.29)
Problem:
In stations in which the maximum load current of some feeders
can exceed the minimum fault current of the protection zones
(e.g. ground fault in impedance grounded power systems), an in-
terrupted CT circuit can cause a differential current higher than
the setting of the current comparison circuit.
To guard against this, the internal REB500 undervoltage function
can be configured as an additional neutral current criterion for
the BBP function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.35)
Sequence:
In the event of a ground fault on a given busbar section (e.g.
BB1), the neutral measuring system for BB1 trips. A ground fault
on a busbar section will normally cause a voltage collapse,
which is detected by the internal undervoltage function for BB1.
REB500 then isolates BB1.
11-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
23110_BFP intertrip
13605_Trip redirection
& &
23335_Trip by BFP
11105_EXT.TRIP
HEST 985035 C
11-62
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-64
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Feeder
11-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-66
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11.13.1. Introduction
An interface is optionally available for connecting the numerical
busbar protection to a station automation system or station moni-
toring system (SCS/SMS).
Network
SCS/SMS Control
LON
IEC 60870-5-103
3)
Modem
2)
Un
B Un
B
E
a
its a
its
RE.58.
y yRE.316
C
C C C
C 1) Network
Un
B Un
B Un
B Un
B Control
E
E E E
its
a a
its a
its a
its
y y y y
HMI500
11-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11.13.2. Hardware
500CIM06
To enable REB500 to communicate via an interbay bus, a proc-
essor module 500CIM06 has to be inserted in the central unit. In
the case of a LON bus, a sub-module 500LBI02 is also plugged
onto the 500CIM06 module (see Section 11.13.2.2 'LON hard-
ware configuration').
11-68
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-70
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
LON:
IEC 60870-5-103
11-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
IEC 61850-8-1:
Setting Significance Default set-
ting
IP address IEC61850-8-1 TCP/IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask IEC61850-8-1 TCP/IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Gateway address IEC61850-8-1 TCP/IP Gateway Ad- 0.0.0.0
dress
Electrical/optical Selection of the Ethernet connector on Optical
the 500CIM06 Module
Non-volatile 61850 Report stack transfers volatile None
RCBs or non-volatile report control blocks (for
communication with third-party sys-
tems)
SNTP1 TCP/IP Address of the SNTP time 127.0.0.1
master
SNTP2 TCP/IP Address of the SNTP standby 127.0.0.1
time master
Time zone correc- Time zone setting (hours/minutes) 0.0
tion (h/m)
Summer time Dialog for switching from standard time See below
settings to summertime and vice versa
Generate I/O Automatic generation of the signals See below
signals needed by IEC 61850
11-72
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
General description
To keep the load on the IBB as low as possible, the bus zone dif-
ferential currents are checked cyclically, but only actually trans-
ferred via the bus if the value has changed.
Example:
Diff.
Current
Zero limit
0 100 200
Values transferred HEST 005020 C
to the SCS
11-74
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Transmit conditions
Int. meas. = Int. meas. + |new current - old current|
if | Int. meas. | > delta
then
Int. meas. = 0
if |new current| < dead band
then
old current = 0, send 0
else
old current = new current, send new current
11-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
HMI500
Settings in this dialog are made for each busbar section (bus
zone) and can be changed after activating the respective field.
The differential current parameters are as follows:
Update period: - Determines how often the
differential current measurement has
to be updated.
- Applies to all bus zones.
Delta L1_L2_L3: - Delta per bus zone for phases
L1, L2 and L3.
Dead band L1_L2_L3: - Dead band per bus zone for
phases L1, L2 and L3.
Delta L0: - Delta per bus zone for the
neutral current L0.
Dead band L0: - Dead Band per bus zone for
the neutral current L0.
Enabled: - Enables polling of the bus zone
differential currents.
The tables below show the interrelationships, units, default set-
tings and the ranges and setting intervals (steps) of the parame-
ters:
11-76
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
WARNING: Delta and Dead band settings that are too low
result in a high data load on the bus. For this reason, care
should be taken to set reasonable values.
11.13.4. LON
11.13.4.2. Addressing
The identification of the REB500 events and the mapping to the
corresponding process objects in the SCS database is done on
the basis of the station address (2 Byte, also referred to as unit
address) and the object address (2 Byte), both of which are in-
cluded with every event telegram.
11-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Object address
The object address defines one REB500 event, a measurement
or a command. It is composed as follows:
The object address is fix allocated per function.
The following address range is reserved for the central unit
1 up to 1073,
and for the bay units
FE_Nr*1074 up to FE_Nr*1074+1073
FE_Nr stands for the number of the bay unit. Provision is made
for exporting object addresses from the configuration tool.
The object address is derived from a basic object address as-
signed to a REB500 signal and an offset determined by the bay
unit.
Object address = Basic object address + Bay unit No. *1074
11-78
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11.13.4.3. Configuration
11-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-80
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Diagnostic information
Internal system diagnostic signals are transferred as pulse-
counter type signals (32 Bit = 4 Byte).
Format: DMCD type 139 Pulse counter value with time tag
The significance of the BCR Bytes is as follows:
Byte number Significance
Byte 3 (HB) Always 0
Byte 2 Init = 1
Major error = 2
Minor error = 4
Not ready = 8
Ready = 16
Last wish = 32
Shutdown = 64
No status = 128
Byte 1 Class { 0..40 }, defines the SW subsystem
Byte 0 (LB) Error number { 0..255 }
11-82
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Status information
Events for the SCS are configured using either HMI500 or REB-
CON.
To export the communication data contained in the database,
select Tools / Export SCS data and LON IBB and then click on
the Export button.
11-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Lines 1 and 2
Module Type of Station HMI500 REBCON DB DB Date Export Date Export Tool Version
IBB Addr. Version Version Version
REB500 LON 257 4.10 4.10 V0.00AR 1998-11-10 98-12-17 AI 98-12-11 V2.10
Station Bay Name Device 4. 5. Signal Technical Signal Event Text Signal Text Signal Type Unit Object LON NV LON NV LON Event Function REB GI
Name Name Field Field Name Identifier Address Index Bit Bay-Bay Filter Nr.
Number Nr.
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 5 500BIO01 11210_Block output 11210_Block output Single 9239 FALSE 15 1 FALSE
2 busbar relays relays Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 0
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 5 500BIO01 11610_External reset 11610_External reset Single 9253 FALSE 15 1 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 5 500BIO01 11620_Inspection_1-On 11620_Inspection_1-On Single 9243 FALSE 15 1 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A3 EVENT BU 3 5 500BIO01 15210_Block OCDT 15210_Block OCDT Single 18189 FALSE 15 5 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A3 EVENT BU 3 5 500BIO01 17205_Block PDF 17205_Block PDF Single 18186 FALSE 15 7 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 20 42315_BBP trip L1 42315_BBP trip L1 Single 8975 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar 500BIO01 Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack 1 20 42320_BBP trip L2 42320_BBP trip L2 Single 8976 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar 500BIO01 Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack 1 20 42325_BBP trip L3 42325_BBP trip L3 Single 8977 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar 500BIO01 Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
11-84
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Station Bay Name Device 4. 5. Signal Technical Signal Event Text Signal Text Signal Type Unit Object LON NV LON NV LON Event Function REB GI
Name Name Field Field Name Identifier Address Index Bit Bay-Bay Filter Nr.
Number Nr.
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 19 43305_BFP trip t1 43305_BFP trip t1 Single 8715 FALSE 15 3 TRUE
2 busbar 500BIO01 Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 7 500AIP01 AIP(7) AIP(7) System 9728 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 7 CSP(7) CSP(7) System 16640 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar 500CPU02 Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A2 EVENT BU 2 5 500BIO01 BIO(5) BIO(5) System 17408 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A2 EVENT BU 2 7 500AIP01 AIP(7) AIP(7) System 17920 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A3 EVENT BU 3 5 500BIO01 BIO(5) BIO(5) System 18176 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A3 EVENT BU 3 7 500AIP01 AIP(7) AIP(7) System 18432 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A4 EVENT BU 4 5 500BIO01 BIO(5) BIO(5) System 18688 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A4 EVENT BU 4 7 500AIP01 AIP(7) AIP(7) System 18944 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 11 CIM(11) CIM(11) System 57344 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar 500CPU02 Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ1.L1 BZ1.L1 Measurement A 8449 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I1 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
11-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Station Bay Name Device 4. 5. Signal Technical Signal Event Text Signal Text Signal Type Unit Object LON NV LON NV LON Event Function REB GI
Name Name Field Field Name Identifier Address Index Bit Bay-Bay Filter Nr.
Number Nr.
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ1.L2 BZ1.L2 Measurement A 8450 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I2 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ1.L3 BZ1.L3 Measurement A 8451 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I3 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ1.L0 BZ1.L0 Measurement A 8452 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I0 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ2.L1 BZ2.L1 Measurement A 8453 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I1 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ2.L2 BZ2.L2 Measurement A 8454 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I2 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ2.L3 BZ2.L3 Measurement A 8455 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I3 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ2.L0 BZ2.L0 Measurement A 8456 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I0 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU CMD_RES - Command 8577 FALSE 15 1 FALSE
2 busbar ET Type 0
sections
4 BU
11-86
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11.13.5.1. Introduction
Busbar protection is not one of the types of protection defined in
IEC 60870-5-103. Nevertheless, the commands and signals of
the REB500 system are modeled as far as possible on functions
defined in the IEC recommendation. The functional scope of the
station protocol is therefore reduced. The backup protection
functions breaker failure, time-overcurrent and end fault that are
optionally available with REB500 are also supported.
According to the IEC recommendation, usage of the private
range is only permitted with regard to the compatibility of existing
devices. For this reason, additional REB500 functions that are
not defined in the recommendation were implemented according
to the future-oriented generic part of IEC 60870-5-103.
REB500 also optionally provides a private range.
Refer to IEC 60870-5-103 for an explanation of the various ab-
breviations.
11-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-88
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-90
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Types of function
FUN Description
<128> Distance protection
<160> O/C protection
<176> Transformer differential protection
<254> Generic
11-91
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-92
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IEC 60870-5-103 Disturbance Recorder signals
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAA;ABB ref.;Feeder;Station number;Signal ID;Signal text
0;CU;-;Null;Null;Null
2;BU2;BU2;2;1;Trip
2;BU2;BU2;2;2;In service
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IEC 60870-5-103 events and private Information Object Identifier settings
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAA;ABB ref.;Feeder;Signal text;IEC FUN;IEC INF
0;CU;BU2;41810_In service;254;18
2;BU1;BU1;23310_BFP trip t2;254;85
2;BU1;BU1;221105_I0INV Trip Si;160;67
2;BU1;BU1;211880_DIST Com Send.2;128;76
11-93
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Diagnostic information
Status and diagnostic information is generated by the various
REB500 application software modules and transferred spontane-
ously as events every time the status changes. A separate group
exists for diagnostic information with an entry for every subsys-
tem of the REB500 system software REBSYS.
11-94
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-95
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
All the other entries in this group consist of the following attrib-
utes that are needed to describe a diagnostic event generated
by one of the software subsystems.
The status of a diagnostic event is indicated by an ASCII string,
which can have one of the following values:
Initializing
Major error
Minor error
Not ready
Ready
Last wish
Shutdown
No status
The error code is assigned by the application when the status
changes and precisely describes the cause of the error.
11-96
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Status information
All the status information relating to binary input and output sig-
nals, internal signals (single-point indications - SPI) and switch-
gear positions (double-point indications - DPI) that are con-
figured in REB500 for transfer via IEC60870-5-103, but are not
covered by the compatible part of the IEC recommendation are
transferred as generic data. An entry is made in the table for
every event configured using HMI500 or REBCON for transfer
via IEC 60870-5-103. Since there can be more events per type
(SPI or DPI) than the maximum number of entries a group can
have (255), the system reserves additional groups as necessary.
By this means, up to 1020 events per event type can be defined
in the generic part.
11-97
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-98
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-99
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-100
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-101
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Private range
Provision is made in the event configuration (see Section
11.13.3.2.) for the user to enter his own private IEC 60870-5-103
definition for each REB500 signal.
The input fields for REB500 signals covered by the public part of
the standard (see Section 11.13.5.2.) have a bright yellow back-
ground their default setting 0 for both IEC function type and in-
formation number. All other signals receive the presetting 0 for
the IEC function type and the information number. A signal de-
fined for protocol 60870-5-103 that is not in the public range and
has 0 set for function type and information number is transmit-
ted via the generic part of the protocol.
11-102
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-103
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Cause of transmission
With the exception of 42 (generic writing command), all the pos-
sible causes of transmission are supported in the command di-
rection.
In the supervisory direction, they are all supported with the ex-
ception of 7 (test mode), 12 (local HMI) and 44 (return confir-
mation of a generic write command).
11-104
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Type identification
The type identification defines the type of ASDU that has been
transferred.
TYPE Description
<1> time-tagged message
<2> time-tagged message with relative time
<5> Identification
<6> Time synchronization
<8> General interrogation termination
<10> Generic data
<11> Generic identification
<23> List of recorded disturbances
<26> Ready for transmission of disturbance data
<27> Ready for transmission of a channel
<28> Ready for transmission of tags
<29> Transmission of tags
<30> Transmission of disturbance values
<31> End of Transmission
TYPE Description
<6> Time synchronization
<7> General interrogation (polling)
<10> Generic data
<20> General command
<21> Generic command
<24> Order for disturbance data transmission
<25> Acknowledgement for disturbance data
transmission
Timeouts
1. Protocol time-out <50 ms as defined in the IEC recommen-
dation applies for the protocol.
2. When a command to upload the disturbance recorder data is
issued, the data have to be transferred from the bay unit to
the central unit first before they are transferred via the IEC
bus. The timeout from the instant the upload command is is-
11-105
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11.13.6.1. Introduction
The REB500 can be integrated into a station network confirming
to the IEC 61850-8-1. The IEC 61850-8-1 configuration is largely
automatic. The event signals need to be configured in order that
they can be transmitted over the IEC 61850 protocol. The alloca-
tion of signals to the IEC 61850 is done automatically, and is ex-
ported as SCD file.
In message transmission, all the REB500 signals are provided
via the IEC 61850. In the ideal case these are allocated to the
predefined logic nodes, however, if this is not the case they can
be transmitted as generic data (PTRC).
In the command direction, only the resetting of LEDs, trip relays,
disturbance recorders and the switching of parameter sets is
planned.
REB500 supports the transfer of disturbance records confirming
to IEC 61850 in the compressed COMTRADE format.
11-106
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-107
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-108
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-109
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-110
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-111
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-112
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-113
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-114
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
DifAClc.phsA.mag.f
Differential- DifAClc.phsB.mag.f
BusZone PDIF
currents DifAClc.phsC.mag.f
DifAClc.neut.mag.f
11-115
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
The disturbance records are read out of the bay units with the
MMS file transfer protocol. The disturbances are available in
zipped COMTRADE format. The file name has the following
structure:
LD/ld/COMTRADE/DRyyyymmddhhmmssfff.ZIP
ld Identification of the logical device
yyyy Year of the recording (Trigger time)
mm Month of the recording (Trigger time)
dd Day of the recording (Trigger time)
hh Hour of the recording (Trigger time)
mm Minute of the recording (Trigger time)
ss Second of the recording (Trigger time)
fff Millisecond of the recording (Trigger time)
11-116
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-117
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-118
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-119
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-120
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-121
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-122
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
General
The T zone is the section of busbar between the CTs plus the
line T up to the open line isolator (see Fig. 11.49 T zone pro-
tection, version 1). The bay protection (distance protection)
does not detect faults in this zone correctly, because the voltage
measured is the wrong one (open line isolator).
This zone is normally protected by an overcurrent function in-
cluded in the line protection. This reacts, however, to CT satura-
tion during through-faults (e.g. busbar faults) and could mal-
operate.
REB500 uses its current restrained differential protection and
phase comparison functions to protect this zone. The corre-
sponding algorithm operates discriminately even if CTs saturate.
Application
Busbar protection systems are generally used to discriminatively
protect main busbars. In addition to this, however, REB500 is
also able to effectively protect the T zone of a 1 breaker
scheme (see tables for versions 16), because it creates an
image of the topology of the entire station with up to 32 inde-
pendent protection zones, each processed by the busbar protec-
tion algorithms (current restrained differential and phase com-
parison protection).
11-123
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
For REB500 to protect the T zone, its image of the station must
include all the components of the 1 breaker scheme (circuit-
breakers, CTs and line isolator).
The same applies when applying the breaker failure and end
fault options.
The T zone protection relies on the image of the station to
measure (current restrained differential and phase comparison)
at the correct points and to intertrip the correct breakers after it
has detected an internal fault (both breakers limiting the T zone).
11-124
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-125
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
With the exception of the end fault function, the same conditions
and considerations apply to version 2 as to version 1. Since
each diameter is equipped with 6 CTs, the protection zones can
be arranged to overlap and an additional end fault protection is
not needed.
11-126
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-127
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
With the exception of the end fault function, the same conditions
and considerations apply to Version 4 as to Version 3.
The three extra CTs (3 bay units) in each diameter create bus-
tie breakers each with two sets of CTs. By overlapping the
zones, faults between the sets of CTs can be tripped without de-
lay.
11-128
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-129
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
LP TP
A1 A2
Q1 Q2 Q6
1 closed closed open S1//X S2//Y -
2 closed closed closed S1// X//Y//S2 - -
// Measuring systems determined by the isolator statuses which are linked to form a single meas-
uring system, e.g. X//Y
11-130
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
BU 1 BU 2 BU 3
C C C
E E E
Bay Un it
Bay Un it
Bay Un it
Q6 Q6
A1 A2
11-131
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Q0 Q9
Bypass busbar
BU_0 BU_9
11-132
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
A C
SX SY
B
Ik11
S1
S2
Ik12
Q Q
A Ik12 C
SX SY
B
Ik2 Ik3 Ik1
11-133
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-134
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-135
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Ik11
S1
S2
Ik12
Q1 Q2
A Ik12 B
SX
Ik2 Ik1
Ik11
S1
S2
S3
Ik13 Q1 Q2 Q3
Ik13 Ik13
Ik1
11-136
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bus-tie breaker
11-137
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
1 breaker scheme
Both circuit-breakers controlling the feeder are tripped (see Sec-
tion 11.16.3.).
Bypass mode
An External TRIP signal applied to circuit-breaker Q0 control-
ling busbar feeder 1 does not isolate the fault when isolator Q7 is
closed (bypass mode). For this reason, circuit-breaker Q0 con-
trolling busbar feeder 2 is automatically opened. Through-faults
can now be correctly tripped.
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Busbar 3
Bypass busbar
Q7
Q0 Q0
Bypass isolator
The External TRIP signal trips circuit-breaker Q0 of busbar
feeder 1, but the fault is still not cleared because the bypass iso-
lator Q7 is closed. The busbar protection then intertrips busbar 3
to finally clear the fault.
11-138
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Busbar 3
Q0 Q7
Busbar feeder 1
11-139
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11.18.2. Display
The settings are still marked as in a three-phase system, i.e. L1,
L2 and L3.
The sampling rates used by the disturbance recorder are 401 Hz
and 802 Hz.
Three windows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed for analog values
and three traces L1, L2 and L3 generated by the disturbance re-
corder.
11-140
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11-141
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-142
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bay unit
1 1
2
I1
5
3 0
4 1
5 5
I2
6 0
L1 L2 7 1
8
I3
5
9 0
10 1
11
I4
5
12 0
1
F1
2 0
U1
F2 4
5 0
U2
L1 L2 U3
8 0
10
11 0
U4
13
14 0
U5
11-143
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-144
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
The three loops L1E, L2E and L1L2 are calculated in parallel.
All three-phase signals and expressions refer in 16 Hz power
systems to two phases (i.e. also in those cases where in
50/60 Hz power systems three-phases are needed to fulfill a
conditions, two phases suffice in 16 Hz power systems).
11.18.8.5. Measurements
Only the following measurements are enabled:
Impedance loop L1E
Impedance loop L2E
Impedance loop L1L2
11.18.8.6. Settings
The following settings differ from the version for 50/60 Hz power
systems:
I0P input Disabled
3I0min Two phase neutral current setting
3U0min Two phase neutral voltage setting
tPSBlock Power swing blocking is disabled
StartMode Only underimpedance start enabled
11-145
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11.18.8.8. VT supervision
The VT supervision function determines the zero-sequence
components of the voltages and currents:
U0 = ( UL1 + UL2 ) / 2
I0 = ( IL1 + IL2 ) / 2
and compares them with the settings U0 SpgWdlbw [UNLE]
and I0 VTSup [IN] and sets the corresponding binary signals U0
and I0 to logical 0 or 1. The logical processing is otherwise the
same as in the 50/60 Hz version.
11-146
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
11.18.10.1. Measurements
Neutral voltage (3U0)
Neutral current (3I0)
Real power component (nicht rotated) of the neutral power
(3U0 3I0)
Reactive power component (nicht rotated) of the neutral
power (3U0 3I0)
Neutral power direction (forwards or backwards); this meas-
urement is only valid if the binary input SchaltEin is enabled.
11-147
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
11-148
1KHL020347-Aen
Application Note
2008 ABB Switzerland Ltd
Baden/Switzerland
4th Edition
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and registration of other in-
dustrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in particular reproduction or making avail-
able to third parties without our explicit consent in writing is prohibited.
The use is only allowed for the purpose laid down in the contract.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the reader find an
error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a warranty of perform-
ance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers in mind that we constantly strive to
improve our products and keep them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to
discrepancies between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Contents
1. Introduction.................................................................................................2
2. Terms / Abbreviations.................................................................................2
3. Symbols......................................................................................................2
1
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
1. Introduction
The operation of any protection scheme is influenced by distortion in the measuring quantities. The
currents to the protection device are distorted, when the current transformer is saturated. In most
cases it is not possible to avoid current transformer saturation for all fault conditions. Therefore
measures are taken in the protection schemes of REB500/REB500sys to allow for current trans-
former saturation while maintained proper operation. REB500/REB500sys can allow for relatively
heavy current transformer saturation, but not unlimited. The demands on the current transformers
and the appropriate calculation checks are the main constituents of this document. Furthermore, the
most common CT types used for protection applications, the corresponding CT standards and the
conversion of the characteristic values from one type to another are illustrated.
2. Terms / Abbreviations
BBP Busbar Protection
CT Current Transformer
HMI Human-Machine-Interface
BS British Standards
3. Symbols
Electrical conductivity
N Power system time constant for a busbar fault or a fault close to the busbar
Z1 Power system time constant for fault at zone-1 reach
A Cross section of the current transformer wiring
a Amplitude compensation factor (transformer differential protection setting)
B Magnetic induction
b Parameter b of the characteristic (transformer differential protection setting)
fN Fundamental frequency
IBAmax Maximal load current
IKSmax Maximal fault current for a busbar fault or a fault close to the busbar
IKSBmax Max current through distance protection CT for a busbar fault
IKSLmax Max current through distance protection CT for a fault on line side of the CT
IKS Z1max Maximal fault current for a fault at zone-1 reach
INprim CT nominal current primary side
INsec CT nominal current secondary side
kssc CT rated symmetrical short circuit current factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
ktd CT transient dimensioning factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
l Length of the current transformer wiring (single length from main CT to REB500 bay unit)
n CT nominal over current factor (related to a CT 5Px)
n CT effective over current factor
n10P CT nominal over current factor (related to a CT 10Px for the conversion to 5Px see Table 2)
PB Total burden connected to the CT
PBG Sum of the burden of all connected devices
PE CT losses
PN CT rated power
RBG Sum of the burden resistors of all connected devices
Rct CT resistance of the secondary winding
Uk CT knee-point voltage
UN Nominal voltage (phase to phase) on primary side
2
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
TPY Core with anti-remanence air Line protection with auto IEC60044-6
gaps reclosure
TPZ Core with considerable air Special applications (e.g. IEC60044-6
gaps, linearised core differential protection of 1 2 3
large generators)
TPS Closed core High impedance BBP IEC60044-6
Low leakage flux Also suitable for most other
Similar to PX and BS class X protection schemes
Applicable
Applicable, mixtures between CTs of type TPZ and other CT-types can result in a differential current measured by
1
the BBP system. This is because the phase displacement of the TPZ-CT (up to 3). This differential current has to
be taken into account for the setting of the pick-up level of BBP differential alarm.
Applicable, the use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ results only in a turn (anticlockwise) of the relay
2
characteristic of some degrees. Possibly ABB Switzerland can be contacted for confirmation that the actual type can
be used.
Applicable, TPZ leads only to a small phase angle shift and can be used for DIFTRA, if the same type is on all sides
3
of the transformer.
*) The distance protection function Z> and transformer differential function DIFTRA is available for REB500sys only.
3
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
The CTs of the different bays connected to a REB500 / REB500sys system can have different CT-
ratios. Any differences between the CT-ratios are compensated by appropriately configuring the set-
ting of the respective bay units (using the HMI-software).
The current transformer ratio should be selected such that the primary is about 120% of the ex-
pected full load current and the current to the protection is larger than the minimum operating value
for all faults to be detected. The minimum operating current for the distance protection in REB500sys
is 10% of the nominal current.
The CTS of the different transformer-sides connected to a REB500 / REB500sys system can have
different CT-ratios. Any differences between the CT-ratios are compensated by appropriately config-
uring the setting of the respective bay units (using the HMI-software).
The differences between the rated currents of the protected object (the transformer) and the CTS
can be compensated by the setting factors a1,a2 and a3 (a3 for three-winding and auto-transformers
only). An appropriate adjustment of these factors ensures, that a nominal current flow in the pro-
tected object will cause a nominal current in the protection relay.
The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protection is larger than
the minimum operating value. This principle must apply to all faults that shall be detected. The mini-
mum operating current of the DIFTRA-function is 10% of the nominal current.
4
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
BBP and DIFTRA 0 and 50% remanence-flux in the current transformer core.
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different
positions. The maximum fault current is reached for three-phase faults or single phase to ground
faults. The current for a single phase to ground fault exceeds the current for a three phase fault
when the zero-sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive-sequence imped-
ance.
When calculating the current transformer requirements, the maximum fault current should be used
and therefore both fault types have to be considered (see Section 4.5.4.).
The algorithms and stabilization features used in REB500 / REB500sys make the busbar protection
largely insensitive to current transformer saturation phenomena, result in a relatively low CT per-
formance needed and make it possible to share protection cores with other protection devices.
For CTs of class TPZ (linearized type), it has to be ensured that the linearity is guaranteed over the
complete range of possible short circuit currents ( means no saturation up to Iksmax). This is a gen-
eral requirement, since if a linear is applied in a protection system it is not recommended to operate
it outside the linear area.
5
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
Remanence flux
It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. This de-
pends on the demands of reliability and economy.
When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin is needed due to
the anti-remanence air gap. For current transformer of the type TPX, the small probability of a fully
asymmetrical fault together with maximum remanence flux in the same direction as the flux gener-
ated by the fault has to be kept in mind for the decision of an additional margin. A fully asymmetrical
fault current will be reached when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations have proved
that 95% of the faults in the network occurs when the voltage is between 40 and 90.
DC time constants
The requirements assume 20 to 120 msec maximum DC time constant for the network and 100%
DC offset.
Remanence flux
See under 4.3.2 Distance protection item Cable resistance and additional load.
DC time constants
The current requirements were tested with DC time constants from 40 to 300 msec.
6
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
The following section provides an overview about how to determine the accuracy factor for the differ-
ent CT types (different standards).
Determination 5Px, 5PRx 10Px, 10PRx TPX ,TPY ,TPZ Class C PX, TPS, Class X
of accuracy C100,C200,
limiting factor C400,C800
n = 20
Corresponding Corresponding
with other CT quantities of IEC
type accuracy class
C100 PN=25 VA
C200 PN=50 VA
C400 PN=100 VA
C800 PN=200 VA
10P20 1
n = 18.8 2
n = 18.8 2
n = 22.5 4
Conversion Class X:
from knee-point
voltage U K I Nsec
n= 1. 3 3
(PX,TPS, class PN + PE
x,) to the
accuracy e.g. CT class X
limiting factor
Uk = 450 V, Insec = 1 A
(IEC, 5Px)
PN = 20 VA, PE = 4 VA
n = 24.4
7
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
1 ANSI C57.13-1 With a transformer in the C100 accuracy class, for example, the ratio error will not exceed 10% be-
tween 1 and 20 times nominal secondary current if the burden does not exceed the nominal burden.
1 x 5 A x 20 = 100 V (nominal burden C100 B-1 = 1, C200 B-2 = 2 , C400 B-4 = 4 , C800 B-8 = 8 )
For the determination of the CT- losses [PE], the resistance of the secondary winding related to the connected CT- ratio
should be present (The resistance for each ratio is normally indicated on the CT type-label).
According to the technical literature, the corresponding IEC60044-1 - accuracy class for a CT class C is 10P20. The
conversion made under Table 2 is based on this assumption.
2 The voltage U (10P) linked to the accuracy limiting factor of a CT 10Px is
above the voltage U(5P) linked to the accuracy limiting factor of a CT 5Px.
These voltages are each linked to an induction level.
Induction levels commonly used for CT manufacturing (example only):
corresponding induction level U (10P) =1.7 Tesla, U(5P) =1.6 Tesla
Usec ~ B
The conversion of the accuracy limiting factor from 10Px to 5Px can be
easily obtained by multiplication with the reversed induction level ratio U(10P)
1.6T / 1.7T = 0.94 . U(5P)
UK
Of course, the induction levels vary from one manufacturer to another.
IEC
The knee point voltage UK of a CT class X linked to the point from which 5Px
3
an increase in the voltage of 10% needs a 50% increase in the magnetiz- BS IEC
ing current is below the voltage U(5P) linked to the accuracy limiting factor Class X 10Px
of a CT 5Px. These voltages are each linked to an induction level.
ANSI
Induction levels commonly used for CT manufacturing (example only): Class
corresponding induction level UK =1.2 Tesla, U(5P) =1.6 Tesla C100-C800
The conversion of the accuracy limiting factor from Class X to 5Px can be
approx. obtained by multiplication with the induction level ratio Im
1.6T/ 1.2T = 1.3
The rated CT power [PN] is a parameter which is not used (necessary) for
the specification of a CT class X . In the conversion formula for determina-
tion of the accuracy limiting factor [n] , any typical value [PN] of a CT class Fig. 1: CT accuracy classes, definition
5P20 can be inserted. As an alternative method, the effective accuracy points
limiting factor [n] can be directly calculated, without using the term [PN]
(ref. to Section 5.3).
4 The overcurrent factor n can be calculated approximately, by using the following CT characteristic values:
Kssc CT rated symmetrical short circuit current factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
Ktd CT transient dimensioning factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
8
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.4.2. Calculation of the effective accuracy limiting factor (n) [universally valid CT calculation]
The effective accuracy limiting (n) is derived from the nominal accuracy factor (n) of the CT protec-
tion core (see Section 4.4.1.), considering the relation between the nominal burden and the con-
nected burden.
or if RBG is given :
l
PB = R BG + 2 I 2
A Nsec
P E = R CT I 2Nsec
For each bay, the performance of the current transformer has to be checked and two conditions have
to be fulfilled.
Condition 1
I
n' > KS max
5*I
N prim
Condition 2 (taking the primary power system time constant into account)
9
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
For each line bay utilized with REB500sys distance protection, the performance of the current trans-
former has to be checked and two conditions have to be fulfilled.
Condition 1
6
(50Hz)
5 (60Hz)
I 4
n' > a KS max
I a 3
N prim
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Power system time constant TN [ms]
Condition 2
14
(50Hz)
12 (60Hz)
10
I
KS Z1max 8
n' > k k
I
Nprim 6
4
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Power system time constant TZ1 [ms]
10
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
For each transformer bay utilized with REB500sys Transformer differential protection, the perform-
ance of the current transformers on each transformer-side has to be checked and two conditions
have to be fulfilled.
Condition 1
n' 15
and
Condition 2
For each winding of the transformer the CTs have to meet the following conditions.
250
Condition 1 200
and
Condition 2 150
n'
Condition 1
100
Condition 2
Slope of the
50 curve accord-
35 ing calculation
30
25
20 0
15 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
10 Power system time constant TN [ms]
5
0
0 10 20 30
11
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
Since the short circuit currents and the network time constants can be quite different for a single
phase to ground fault (1-ph-g) and a three phase fault (3-ph), the CT performance test has to cover
both fault situations. A CT performance check, which is based on the three phase fault data only is
not sufficient, if the single phase to ground fault current and/or the associated network time constant
exceeds the three phase fault values.
Table 3 below gives an overview about the CT performance test conditions and the associated fault
parameter to be checked for 1-ph-g and 3-ph faults.
Fault situation Single ph to ground (1-ph-g) Three phase (3-ph) Maximal value (1-ph-g) or (3-ph)
CT test condition IKSmax IKS Z1max TN TZ1 IKSmax IKS Z1max TN TZ1 IKSmax IKS Z1max TN TZ1
Table 3 : CT- performance check considering different fault parameters for 1-ph-g and 3-ph faults
12
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
5. Calculation example
This is an example of a CT performance check for a REB500sys system mounted in a 220 kV-
station. The station contains three different types of CTs connected to one busbar protection system.
Such a mixture of CTs is not usual, but it discloses an illustrative calculation example. This calcula-
tion example is based on the simplified assumption, that roughly the same short circuit values are
prevail for single phase to ground and phase to phase faults (see topic under Section 4.5.4.).
13
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
5.3. Calculation-check
Calculation See Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 if.. Remarks
section
Line Trafo
P N + P E
4.4.2. - 89 119 160 100 Class x: see calculation above
n' = n
P B + PE
U I Nsec
n' = K
1 .3
PB + PE
I
KS max 4.5.1. - o.k. o.k. o.k. o.k. Condition 1 Check passed!
n' >
5*I ?
N prim
n'10 for N 120ms ? 4.5.1. - o.k. o.k. o.k. o.k. Condition 2 Check passed!
I
4.5.2. - - - o.k. - Condition 1 Check passed!
n' > a * KS max
I ?
N prim
Final conclusion
Results from the - The CTs installed in this station fulfill the All checks passed!
CT checks CT-requirements of the used protection
functions without any restrictions.
? Check criterion
14
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
The busbar protection REB500 / REB500sys may only be installed, operated and maintained
by trained personnel.
Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is assured, providing the infor-
mation and recommendations contained in the Operating Instructions.
It is scarcely possible for the instructions (inclusive this application note) to cover every
eventuality that can occur when using technical devices and systems. We would therefore
request the user to notify us directly or our agent of any unusual observations or of in-
stances, in which these instructions provide no or insufficient information.
In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations and safety procedures must
always be strictly observed both when connecting up and commissioning this equipment.
Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or setting resistors, which may be
necessary, may only be performed by appropriately qualified personnel.
We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage, which may result from incorrect
operation of this equipment, even if no reference is made to the particular situation in the
Operating Instructions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Power Technology Systems
Brown Boveri Strasse 6
CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland
Phone +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77
E-mail substation.automation@ch.abb.com
www.abb.com/substationautomation
December 08
12-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-8
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-10
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Edition June 2008
AppAppicationp
Application Description
2002 ABB Switzerland Ltd
Baden/Switzerland
7th Edition
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and
registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorised use,
in particular reproduction or making available to third parties without our explicit
consent in writing, is prohibited.
The use is only allowed for the purpose laid down in the contract.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of
this the reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest
convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a
warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our cus-
tomers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them
abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies
between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Table of contents
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................ 3
1.1. Line protection variants............................................................... 3
1.2. Transformer protection variants .................................................. 4
1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
4. DOCUMENTATION .................................................................. 39
4.1. Connection diagrams Line protection variants ....................... 40
4.2. Connection diagrams Transformer protection variants .......... 50
2
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
1. INTRODUCTION
One-and-half breaker
Single busbar
3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
4
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
The variants treated herein are such that all the above
combinations can be realized for single and double bus stations
and with limitations in 1-1/2 breaker stations.
5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
6
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Fig. 2.1 and the following tables give an overview of the structure
of the station and bay level protection functions in the bay unit
500BU03 (also shown here as BU03). The line protection
functionalities that vary in each of the configurations are
accessed through so-called bay protection (BP) input and BP
output blocks. These are software blocks and can accommodate
up to 20 input and 120 output signals respectively.
It is to be noted that all signals that are to be mapped to the
output contacts, substation automation systems SAS (via LON or
IEC 60870-5-103 bus) or LEDs have first to be programmed onto
the BP output block.
8
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
9
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
10
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
C.B.
Back-Up
I
OCDT I0INV
C.T.
U
V.T.
DIROCDT
CHKI3PH
11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
3.1.1.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.1.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the Oper-
ating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (isolator positions Q1 and Q2)
are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs 17, 18
and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are used for
the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the inputs 01 to
04 for the starting signals (phase segregated as well as 3 phase)
from both main 1 and main 2 protections.
The back-up protections start the BFP function internally via
dedicated signals through the BP output block.
The Carrier Receive signal required for the DIROCDT function
is taken in from input 05 through BP input 03.
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip coil 1
and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segregated. Output 02 is used
for interlocking the manual close command to the circuit-breaker.
Outputs 04 and 06 serve the purpose of sending remote trips to
the other end of the line.
Output 05 is used for the carrier send of the DIROCDT function.
12
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the line protection
trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
All the REB500sys line protection functions shall trip 3-pole.
Further, these are arranged to activate both trip coils since they
share the same hardware as the station level functions, which
have to trip both the coils.
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
Line protection
C.B.
DIST
I
C.T.
DIREFGND
U
V.T.
CHKI3PH
13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
3.1.2.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.3.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (isolator positions Q1 and Q2)
are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs 17, 18
and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are used for
the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the inputs 01 to
04 for the starting signals (phase segregated as well as 3 phase)
from main 1 protection.
The distance function in REB500sys starts the BFP function,
phase segregated, while the back-up protections start the BFP
function 3-pole, internally via dedicated signals through the BP
output block.
The Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP input
01 to block the distance function, while input 19 through BP input
09 brings in the Prepare 1-pole trip signal from the
autoreclosure function to the main 2 distance protection.
The carrier receive signals required for the DIST and
DIREFGND functions are taken in from inputs 05 and 06 through
BP inputs 03 and 04 respectively.
The DIREFGND function takes in the Breaker All Poles Closed
condition to activate itself from input 11 through BP input 05.
The Manual Close command is used for the switch-onto-fault
feature within the distance function, taken from input 08 via BP
input 02.
The overcurrent function OCDT is kept blocked when the dis-
tance function is operational.
14
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip coil 1
and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segregated. Output 02 is used
for close block interlock purposes. Outputs 04 and 06 serve the
purpose of sending remote trips to the other end of the line.
Outputs 05 and 07 are used for the Carrier Send of the DIST
and DIREFGND functions. It is also possible to have a common
communication channel for DIST and DIREFGND functions.
Outputs 08 to 10 are used for interaction with the autoreclosure
function. The autoreclosure functionality of the REL316*4 would
necessitate these signals. The signal Start SOTF would not be
required if the Manual Close command is used to block the
autoreclosure function.
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the line protection
trip outputs shall be in self reset mode. The distance function
shall trip single-pole while all other line protection functions shall
trip 3-pole. Further, these are arranged to activate both trip coils
since they share the same hardware as the station level func-
tions, which have to trip both the coils.
15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
Line protection
C.B.
DIST
I
C.T. AR
U DIREFGND
V.T.
CHKI3PH
16
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.1.3.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.5.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (isolator positions Q1 and Q2)
are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs 17, 18
and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are used for
the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the inputs 01 to
04 for the starting signals (phase segregated as well as 3 phase)
from main 1 protection.
The distance function in REB500sys starts the BFP function,
phase segregated while the back-up protections start the BFP
function 3-pole, internally via dedicated signals through the BP
output block.
The Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP input
01 to block the distance function, while input 19 through BP input
09 brings in the Prepare 1-pole trip signal from the
autoreclosure function in main 1 to the main 2 distance protec-
tion.
The Carrier Receive signals required for the DIST and
DIREFGND functions are taken in from inputs 05 and 06 through
BP inputs 03 and 04 respectively.
The DIREFGND function takes in the Breaker All Poles Closed
condition to activate itself from input 11 through BP input 05.
17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip coil 1
and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segregated. Output 02 is used
for close block interlock purposes. Outputs 04 and 06 serve the
purpose of sending remote trips to the other end of the line.
Outputs 05 and 07 are used for the Carrier Send of the DIST
and DIREFGND functions. It is also possible to have a common
communication channel for DIST and DIREFGND functions.
Outputs 8 to 10 are used for interaction with the autoreclosure
function in main 1 terminal. The autoreclosure functionality of the
REL316*4 would necessitate these signals. It shall however be
ensured that the manual close command is used to block the AR
function in main 1 terminal as well.
The close command from the autoreclosure function is issued
via output 03.
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the line protection
trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
The distance function shall trip single-pole while all other line
protection functions shall trip 3-pole.
18
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Furthermore, these are arranged to trip both trip coils since they
share the same hardware as the station level functions which
have to trip both the coils.
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
U BB2
UL
SYNC
V.T.
DIREFGND
CHKI3PH
19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
3.1.4.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.7.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (isolator positions Q1 and Q2)
are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs 17, 18
and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are used for
the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the inputs 01 to
04 for the starting signals (phase segregated as well as 3 phase)
from main 1 protection.
The distance function in REB500sys starts the BFP function
phase segregated, while the back-up protections start the BFP
function 3-pole, internally via dedicated signals through the BP
output block.
The signal Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP
input 01 to block the distance function and through BP input 11
to block the synchrocheck function. Input 19 through BP input 09
brings in the Prepare 1-pole trip signal from the autoreclosure
function in main 1 to the main 2 distance protection.
20
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip coil 1
and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segregated. Output 2 is used
for close block interlock purposes. Outputs 04 and 06 serve the
purpose of sending remote trips to the other end of the line.
Outputs 05 and 07 are used for the Carrier Send of the DIST
and DIREFGND functions. It is also possible to have a common
communication channel for DIST and DIREFGND functions.
21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
UBB2
UL OVDT
V.T.
OCDT I0INV
DIROCDT
CHKI3PH
22
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.1.5.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.9.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (isolator positions Q1 and Q2)
are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs 17, 18
and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are used for
the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the inputs 01 to
04 for the starting signals (phase segregated as well as 3 phase)
from main 1 protection. The back-up protections start the BFP
function 3-pole, internally via dedicated signals through the BP
output block.
The signal Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP
input 11 to block the synchrocheck function.
The Carrier Receive signal required for the DIROCDT function
is taken in from input 05 through BP input 03.
The autoreclosure function takes in the signal OCO Ready
from input 19 through BP input 08.
Inputs 07 and 08 are the Bus VT MCB Fail signals to block the
synchrocheck function taken in through BP inputs 12 and 13 re-
spectively.
The manual close command is used to block the autoreclosure
function. It is taken form the input 06. The CB Open input to
block the autoreclosure is taken internally through BP input 07.
The three inputs Start, Trip CB and Trip CB 3P from both
main 1 and main 2 protections needed for the autoreclosure
function are taken from the inputs 10 to 12.
The voltage selection for the synchrocheck function is done
using the bus isolator positions taken in internally through BP in-
puts 14 and 15.
Furthermore, busbar and breaker-failure protection trips also
block autoreclosure through OR gate 12.
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip coil 1
and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segregated. Output 02 is used
for close block interlock purposes. The outputs 04 and 06 serve
the purpose of sending remote trip to the other end of the line.
Output 05 is used for the Carrier Send of the DIROCDT func-
tion.
Outputs 08 and 07 are used to issue the Prepare 3 Pole trip
commands to both main 1 and main 2.
24
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Transformer Bay 2wdg. / 3 wdg. Transf. REB500sys Bay Unit Transformer Variant 1 (T-V1)
BB - A - I
Station Protection A - Side
BB - A - II
BBP BFP EFP
Transformer Bay Auto-Transf.
BB - A - I Bay Protection
BB - A - II DIFTRA
C.B. A
A - Side
IA
C.T. A TH OCINST OCDT OCINV I0INV
A = primary side
C.T. B C.T. C
CHKI3PH A - Side
C.B. B C.B. C
IC
CHKI3PH B - Side
IB
C.T. C CHKI3PH C - Side (if existing)
BB - B BB - C (If existing)
C.T. B
C.B. C C.B. B
BB - C BB - B
25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
3.2.1.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.11.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (A-Side, isolator positions Q1
and Q2) are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs
17, 18 and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are
used for the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the
inputs 01 and 03 for the starting signals (3 phase starting from
protection Group 2 and external back up protection).
The optocoupler inputs 5 to 8 are used for the connection of the
mechanical protection inputs. Each input can be assigned to the
REB500sys inherent event and disturbance recording. The
tripping inputs (optocoupler input 5 mechanic prot. trip 1 and
optocoupler input 7 mechanic prot. trip 2) are routed to the
26
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip circuit
breaker A-side coil 1 and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segre-
gated. Output 02 is used for interlocking the manual close
command to this circuit-breaker.
The outputs 3 and 7 are used to activate the transformer
protection tripping relays 94-1 and 94-2, in order to trip the circuit
breakers around the transformer, if the REB500sys transformer
protection has picked-up.
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the transformer
protection trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
The outputs 06 and 08 serve the purpose of sending remote trip
to the transformers B- side and output 09 the C-side (if existing).
In parallel to a REB500sys transformer protection tripping-
command, which will trip all CBs around the transformer, a
starting command for the A-Side BFP (integrated in the
REB500sys) is activated internally and starting commands are
sent through the outputs 10 and 04 to BFP on B-Side and C-
Side (if existing).
The outputs 04 could be used for a hardwired alarm, if there is
no BFP on C-Side.
The output 05 is not used and free for configuration accordingly.
27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
28
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.2.2.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.14.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (A-Side, isolator positions Q1
and Q2) are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs
17, 18 and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are
used for the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the
inputs 01 and 03 for the starting signals (3 phase starting from
protection Group 2 and external back up protection).
The optocoupler inputs 5 to 8 are used for the connection of the
mechanical protection inputs. Each input can be assigned to the
REB500sys inherent event and disturbance recording.
The tripping inputs (optocoupler input 5 mechanic prot. trip 1
and optocoupler input 7 mechanic prot. trip 2) are routed to
the REB500sys Transformer protection trip 1 and 2 (output 03
and 07). In addition the mechanical protection trip and the
breaker position (Q0-ON auxiliary contact input 18) are
29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip circuit
breaker A-side coil 1 and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segre-
gated. Output 02 is used for interlocking the manual close
command to this circuit-breaker.
The outputs 3 and 7 are used to activate the transformer
protection tripping relays 94-1 and 94-2, in order to trip the circuit
breakers around the transformer, if the REB500sys transformer
protection has picked-up.
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the transformer
protection trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
The outputs 06 and 08 serve the purpose of sending remote trip
to the transformers B- side.
In parallel to a REB500sys transformer protection tripping-
command, which will trip all CBs around the transformer, a
starting command for the A-Side BFP (integrated in the
REB500sys) is activated internally while a starting command is
sent through the output 10 to BFP on B-Side.
The outputs 04, 05 and 09 are not used and free for
configuration accordingly.
30
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Overfluxing protection
U/fDT (Definite time overfluxing protection)
U/fINV (Inverse time overfluxing protection)
32
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.2.3.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.17.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (A-Side, isolator positions Q1
and Q2) are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs
17, 18 and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are
used for the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the
inputs 01 and 03 for the starting signals (3 phase starting from
protection Group 2 and external back up protection).
The optocoupler inputs 5 to 8 are used for the connection of the
mechanical protection inputs. Each input can be assigned to the
REB500sys inherent event and disturbance recording.
The tripping inputs (optocoupler input 5 mechanic prot. trip 1
and optocoupler input 7 mechanic prot. trip 2) are routed to
the REB500sys Transformer protection trip 1 and 2 (output 03
and 07). In addition the mechanical protection trip and the
breaker position (Q0-ON auxiliary contact input 18) are
connected to the inputs of an AND-Gate. The output of this gate
is connected to the External start input of the BFP protection.
While the circuit breaker Q0 is closed a mechanical protection
trip will start (External start) the BFP regardless of the current
amplitude in the bay concerned. The Q0-ON input ensures, that
the BFP will be reset, when the CB opens.
The optocoupler inputs 10 to 12 are inputs of the DIFFTRA
function. Input 10 is used, to block the protection function. The
input 11 activates the inrush restraint feature, although the
transformer is already energized (e.g. energizing a parallel
transformer -condition), while input 12 activates the high-set
setting instead of the basic setting which is normally used.
The optocoupler input 20 is a common blocking input connected
to the voltage functions.
The optocoupler inputs 02, 04 and 19 are not used and free for
configuration accordingly.
33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip circuit
breaker A-side coil 1 and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segre-
gated. Output 02 is used for interlocking the manual close
command to this circuit-breaker.
The outputs 3 and 7 are used to activate the transformer
protection tripping relays 94-1 and 94-2, in order to trip the circuit
breakers around the transformer, if the REB500sys transformer
protection has picked-up.
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the transformer
protection trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
The outputs 06 and 08 serve the purpose of sending remote trip
to the transformers B- side.
In parallel to a REB500sys transformer protection tripping-
command, which will trip all CBs around the transformer, a
starting command for the A-Side BFP (integrated in the
REB500sys) is activated internally and starting commands are
sent through the outputs 10 to BFP on B-Side.
The outputs 04, 05 and 09 are not used and free for
configuration accordingly.
34
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Overfluxing protection
U/fDT (Definite time overfluxing protection)
U/fINV (Inverse time overfluxing protection)
3.2.4.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.20. For ease of
understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
36
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (A-Side, isolator positions Q1
and Q2) are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs
17, 18 and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are
used for the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the
inputs 01 and 03 for the starting signals (3 phase starting from
protection Group 1 / Group 2 and external back up protection).
The optocoupler inputs 5 to 8 are used for the connection of the
mechanical protection inputs. Each input can be assigned to the
REB500sys inherent event and disturbance recording.
The tripping inputs (optocoupler input 5 mechanic prot. trip 1
and optocoupler input 7 mechanic prot. trip 2) are routed to
the REB500sys Transformer protection trip 1 and 2 (output 03
and 07). In addition the mechanical protection trip and the
breaker position (Q0-ON auxiliary contact input 18) are
connected to the inputs of an AND-Gate. The output of this gate
is connected to the External start input of the BFP protection.
While the circuit breaker Q0 is closed a mechanical protection
trip will start (External start) the BFP regardless of the current
amplitude in the bay concerned. The Q0-ON input ensures, that
the BFP will be reset, when the CB opens.
The optocoupler input 20 is a common blocking input connected
to the voltage functions.
The optocoupler inputs 02, 04, 10, 11, 12 and 19 are not used
and free for configuration accordingly.
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip circuit
breaker A-side coil 1 and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segre-
gated. Output 02 is used for interlocking the manual close
command to this circuit-breaker.
The outputs 3 and 7 are used to activate the transformer
protection tripping relays 94-1 and 94-2, in order to trip the circuit
breakers around the transformer, if the REB500sys transformer
Back-Up protection has picked-up.
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the transformer
protection trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
The outputs 06 and 08 serve the purpose of sending remote trip
to the transformers B-side.
37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
38
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
4. DOCUMENTATION
39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
In Service
21805
Start
L1L2L3
BP Configurable 01
BP Input Output
Trip CB
214105 01
Start L1
214710 15
Carr. Rec. Start L2
03 114805 214715 16
Start L3
214720 17
Carr. Send
214805 04 05
DIROCDT OR
09
212105 Trip 07
OCDT
221105 Trip 08
I0INV
224105 Trip 09
CHKI3Ph
03
(Spare)
07
(Spare)
08
(Spare) (Spare)
09
(Spare) (Spare)
10
(Spare) (Spare)
(Spare)
11
(Spare)
12
(Spare)
19
(Spare)
(Spare)
40
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
1 1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C
2 C R01 2 In service
OC 02
Start BFP Phase L2 3
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03 C R02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC 04 6
7
7
8
9
C R03 8 Spare
Carrier recei ve, dir. O/C p rot. OC 05
10 9
Spare OC 06
11 10
C R04 Remote tri p, channel 1
12 11
13 C R05
12
Carrier send, dir. O/C prot.
OC 07
14 13
OC 08
Manual close command 15 C R06 Remote trip, channel 2
14
16 C R07 Spare
15
Q0 Manual Close comm and 17
OC 09
+ AR Close command 18
1
1
Spare OC 10 B D
2
2
Spare OC 11 C R08 3
Spare
3
Spare 4
OC 12 C R09
4
Spare
5 C R10 Spare
5
6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC 13 6
7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC 14 7
8 C R11
8 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC 15
9 C R12 Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
9
10
C R13 10
Trip phase L3, trip coil 1
11
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC 16
11
12
Breaker Q 0 open OC 17 12
13
Breaker Q 0 closed OC 18 C R14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
14
15 C R15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
16 C R16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
Spare OC 19
17
Spare 18
OC 20
41
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
42
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
1 1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C
2 C R 01 2 In service
OC 02
Start BFP Phase L2 3
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03 C R 02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC 04 6
7
7
8
9
C R 03 8 Spare
Carrier receive, distance prot. OC 05
9
10
Carrier recei ve, DEF prot. 11
OC 06
10
C R 04 Remote trip, channel 1
12 11
13
C R 05
12
Carrier send, distance prot.
Spare OC 07
14 13
OC 08
Manual Close Command 15 C R 06 Remote tri p, channel 2
14
16 C R 07 15 Carrier send, DEF prot.
Q0 Manual Command + 17
OC 09
AR CLOSE Command 18
1
1
Line V T MCB fail OC 10 B D 2
2
CB all poles closed, DEF prot. OC 11 C R 08 3 Start L1L2L3 to AR
3
Spare OC 12 C R 09
4
Trip CB 3-pol e to AR
4
5
C R 10 Trip CB to AR
5
6 6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC 13
7 7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC 14
C R 11 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
8 8
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open 9
OC 15
C R 12 Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
9
10 C R 13 10
Trip phase L3, trip coil 1
11
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC 16 11
12
12
Breaker Q 0 open OC 17
13
OC 18 C R 14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
Breaker Q 0 closed 14
C R 15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
15
C R 16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
16
Prepare 1-pol e trip from mai n 1 OC 19
17
Spare 18
OC 20
43
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
OC Inputs HV/EHV, Double Bus, 1-Pole Breaker, Line Variant 3 (L-V3) CR Outputs
Q1 OFF TRIP
13 11530 C
Q1 ON 21110 11
14 11530 D
Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP
16
Q2 ON
11530 D 12
13
Q0 OFF SP
17 11530 A ITT 14
Q0 ON
18 11530 B EFP
Q0 Manual Close Command + AR CLOSE Command Rem TRIP
09 11505 24105
15
Start L1 (Main 1)
01 13710
Start L2 (Main 1)
02 13720
03
Start L3 ( Main 1)
13730 16
Start L1L2L3
04 13740
13770 BFP 02
13775
BFP TRIP
13780 23105
Rem TRIP
13785 23110 04
06
BP Default Output
Strt.L1
Strt.L2
21805 Strt.L3
(In Service)
SL1L2L3
Blk part Alarm CU
BP Configurable
BP Input Output
01
Ext Blk Dist
10 01 111205 211105 Trip CB L1 01
Manual Close Command
08 02 111505 211110 Trip CB L2 02
Carr. Rec.
05 03 111815 211115 Trip CB L3 03
Prep1PTrip M1 AR
19 09 111825 211880 Carr. Send 04 05
OR
DIST 211710
Start L1L2L3/
11 TripCB 3Ph/
211320 Trip CB
Z Extension AR
111830 211305 OR
DistBlckd
211405 09
CB Open
07 118515 218310
Manual Close Command
16 118535 218845
OCO
12 08 118505
21110 118205(Ext Blk AR)
M1 Healthy/Service Mode OR
20 10 12
23105
Permit to close
07 17 118820 AR Definitive Trip
218315 11
Close Command
Start L1L2L3 218605 12 03
118705 AR Ready
Trip CB 3P 218805 16
118305
Trip CB
118310
44
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C 1
2
OC 02
CR 01 2 In service
Start BFP Phase L2 3
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03
CR 02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC 04 6
7
8 7
9 CR 03 8 AR close command
Carrier recei ve, distance prot. OC 05
10 9
Carrier recei ve, DEF prot. 11
OC 06
10
1 1
OC 10 B D
Line V T MCB fail 2
2
OC 11
CB all poles closed, DEF prot. CR 08 3 Start L1L2L3 to AR in main 1
3
OCO ready for AR release OC 12
4 CR 09
4
Trip CB 3-pole to AR in main 1
5 CR 10 Trip CB to AR in main 1
5
6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC 13 6
7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC 14 7
8 CR 11 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open 9
OC 15 8
CR 12
9 Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
10
CR 13 10
Trip phase L3, trip coil 1
11
OC 16
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed 11
12
OC 17
Breaker Q 0 open 13
12
OC 18
Breaker Q 0 closed 14 CR 14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
15 CR 15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
16 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
Prepare 1-pole trip from main 1 OC 19 CR 16 15
17
Main 1 healthy/in service mode (Blk. AR) OC 20
18
45
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
OC Inputs CR Outputs
HV/EHV, Double Bus, 1-Pole Breaker, Line Variant 4 (L-V4)
Q1 OFF TRIP
13 11530 C
Q1 ON 21110 11
14 11530 D
Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP
Q2 ON 12
16 11530 D
13
Q0 OFF SP
17 11530 A ITT 14
Q0 ON
18 11530 B EFP
Q0 Manual Close + AR Close Command CB Rem TRIP
09 11505 24105
15
Start L1 (Main 1)
01 13710
Start L2 (Main 1)
02 13720
Start L3 ( Main 1) 16
03 13730
Start L1L2L3
04 13740
13770 BFP 02
13775
BFP TRIP
13780 23105
Rem TRIP
13785 23110 04
06
BP Default Output
Strt.L1
Strt.L2
21805
(In Service) Strt.L3
SL1L2L3
Blk part Alarm CU
BP Configurable
BP Input Output
01
Ext Blk Dist Trip CB L1
01 111205 211105 01
Trip CB L2
211110 02
Carr. Rec. Trip CB L3
05 03 111815 211115 03
Prep1PTrip M1 AR Carr. Send
19 09 OR
111825 211880 04 05
DIST 211710 TripCB 3Ph/
Start L1L2L3/
11
211320 Trip CB
Z Extension AR
111830 211305 OR
DistBlckd
211405 09
211780
Start SOTF
CB Open
07 118515 218310
Start SOTF
118210 218845
OCO
12 08 118505
21110 118205(Ext Blk AR)
M1 Healthy/Service Mode OR
20 10 12
118820
23105
AR Definitive Trip
218315 11
Close Command
Start L1L2L3 218605 12 03
118705 218805 AR Ready
16
Trip CB 3P
118305
Trip CB
118310
Permit To Close
Blk Trig L
10 11 117225 217410
Blk Trig B1
07 12 117215 217105 17
Blk Trig B2
08 13 117220
B1 Act
14 117805
B2 Act
15 117810
SYNC
46
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC01 A C 1
2
OC02
CR01 2 In service
Start BFP Phase L2 3
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC03
CR02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC04 6
7
8 7
1 1
Line V T MCB fail OC10 B D
2 2
CB all poles closed, DEF prot. OC11
CR08 Start L1L2L3 to AR in main 1
3
3
OCO ready for AR release OC12
CR09 Trip CB 3-pol e to AR in main 1
4 4
5 CR10 Trip CB to AR in main 1
5
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open 6
OC13 6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed 7
OC14 7
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open 8 CR11 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
OC15 8
9
CR12
9 Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
10
CR13 10
Trip phase L3, trip coil 1
11
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
Breaker Q 0 open OC17
12
13
Breaker Q 0 closed 14
OC18
CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
15 CR15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
16
Prepare 1-pol e trip from mai n 1 OC19 CR16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
17
Main 1 healthy/in service mode (Blk. AR) OC20
18
47
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
OC Inputs HV/EHV, Double Bus, 1-Pole Breaker, Line Variant 5 (L-V5) CR Outputs
Q1 OFF
13 11530 C 21110
TRIP
11
Q1 ON
14 11530 D
Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP 12
Q2 ON
16 11530 D
13
Q0 OFF
17 11530 A 14
Q0 ON SP ITT
18 11530 B EFP
Q0 Manual Close Command + AR CLOSE Command Rem TRIP
09 11505 24105
15
Start L1 (Main 1/ Main 2)
01 13710
02
Start L2 (Main 1/ Main 2)
13720 16
Start L3 (Main 1/ Main 2)
03 Start L1L2L3
13730
04 13740
BFP
02
BFP TRIP
23105
13785 23110 Rem TRIP
04
06
BP Default Output
21805
In Service
Start
L1L2L3
BP Configurable 01
BP Input Output
Trip CB
214105 01
Start L1
214710 15
05 03 Carr. Rec.
114805 214715 Start L2
16
Start L3
214720 17
Carr. Send
214805 04 05
DIROCDT
OR
09
Trip
216105 05
OVDT
Trip
212105 07
OCTD
221105 Trip
08
I0INV
Trip
224105 09
CHKI3Ph
Permit To Close
09
(Spare)
Blk Trig L
20 11 117225 10
Blk Trig B1
07 12 117215 217105 17 LED 20
(Spare)
Blk Trig B2
08 13 117220
B1 Act
14 117805
B2 Act
15 117810
SYNC
48
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C 1
2 CR01 2 In service
Start BFP Phase L2 3
OC 02
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03
CR02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC 04
6
7
8 7
CR03 8
9 AR close command
Carrier receive, dir. O/C prot. OC 05
10 9
Manual Close Command 11
OC 06
10
12 CR04
11
Remote trip, channel 1
13 CR05 Carrier send, dir. O/C prot.
Bus 1 VT MCB fail OC 07 12
14
OC 08 13
Bus 2 VT MCB fail 15 Remote trip, channel 2
CR06
14
16
CR07
15 Prepare 3-pol e trip to main 2
Q0 Manual Close Comm and + 17 OC 09
AR CLOSE Command 18
1 1
Start L1L2L3 from main 1/m ain 2 OC 10 B D
2
2
Trip CB from m ain 1/main 2 OC 11
CR08 Prepare 3-pole trip to main 1
3
3
Trip CB 3-pol e from main 1/m ain 2 4
OC 12 CR09 Spare
4
5 CR10 Spare
5
6
OC 13 6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open
7
OC 14 7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed
8
OC 15
CR11
8 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open 9
CR12
9
Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
10
CR13 10
Trip phase L3, trip coil 1
11
OC 16
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed 12
11
OC 17
12
Breaker Q 0 open 13
OC 18
14 CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
Breaker Q 0 closed
15 CR15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
16
OC 19 CR16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
OCO ready for AR release
17
Line V T MCB fail 18
OC 20
49
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
50
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
8 7
9 CR03 8
Mechanic Protection TRIP 1 OC05
Transf . Prot. TR IP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
OC06 Tripping rel ay (94-1) Trip CB A/B/CSide *)
Mechanic Protection Alarm 1
11 10
12 CR04
11 Transf . Prot.Trip Start BFP on C-Side *)
13 CR05
Mechanic Protection TRIP 2 OC07 12
14
OC08 13
Mechanic Protection Alarm 2
15 CR06
14 Rem ote Trip 2 to B-Side
16
CR07 Transf . Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
17 Tripping rel ay (94-2) Trip CB A/B/CSide *)
A-Side Breaker Q0 Manual Close Com m and OC09
18
1 1
Block Transf orm er Diff. Protection OC10 B D
2
2
Transf orm er Diff. Inrush input OC11
CR08 3
3 Rem ote Trip 1 to B-Side
Transf orm er Diff. high set OC12 CR09
4 4 Rem ote Trip 1 to C-Side *)
5 CR10
5 Transf . Prot.Trip Start BFP on B-Side
6
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC13 6
7
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC14 7
8 CR11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC15 8 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
9
CR12
9 Trip phase L2, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
10
CR13 10 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
A-Side Breaker Q0 ope n OC17
12
13
A-Side Breaker Q0 closed OC18
14 CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side
Legend:
*) C-Side, if existing
51
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
52
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
OR
37
Central Unit
Block Differential prot. DIFTRA Block
10 01 129205 Trafo Prot.
Inrush Input DIFTRA TRIP BP Output (configurable)
DIFTRA Inrush TRIP to
11 High Set Input
02 129605 229105
L1L2L3
01
DIFTRA High Set DIFTRA TRIP L1
12 03 129610
DIFTRA 229110
DIFTRA TRIP L2
02 Group1 Group2
Mech. prot TRIP 1 Mech
229115
DIFTRA TRIP L3
03 (94-1) (94-2)
05 17 229120 04
TRIP1
229805 DIFTRA Inrush
05 03
DIFTRA Stabiliz.
Mech. prot Alarm 1 229810 06
06 18 OR not used 04
11840_GP_IN_1 35
38 not used 05
OR
36
Mech. prot TRIP 2 Mech
07 19 A- Side
TRIP2
TH Block TH TRIP
07
128205 228105 07
Mech. prot Alarm 2
20 TH TH Start not used 09
08 228705 08
11845_GP_IN_2 OR
28 09
OCINST Block OCINST TRIP
126205 226105 10
04 OCINST 226705
OCINST Start
11
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 12
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
13
OCINV Block OCINV TRIP
113205 213105 14
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
15
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
121205 221105 16
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
17
OR
29
55
B- Side Neutral grounding (if existing)
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 22
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
23
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
06 121205 221105 24
I0INV 221705 I0INV Start
25
I0INV Block
OR
35
B- Side
OR
30
CHKI3PH
A-Side 224605 picked up 56
CHKI3PH
Legend :
53
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
8 7
9 CR03 8
Mechanic Protection TRIP 1 OC05
Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
OC06 Tripping relay (94-1) Trip CB A/BSide
Mechanic Protection Alarm 1
11 10
12 CR04
11 Spare
13 CR05
Mechanic Protection TRIP 2 OC07 12 Spare
14
OC08 13
Mechanic Protection Alarm 2 15 CR06
14 Remote Trip 2 to B-Side
16
CR07 Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
17 Tripping relay (94-2) Trip CB A/BSide
A-Side Breaker Q0 Manual Close Command OC09
18
1 1
Block Transformer Diff. Protection OC10 B D
2
2
Transformer Diff. Inrush input OC11
CR08 3 Remote Trip 1 to B-Side
3
Transformer Diff. high set OC12 CR09
4 4 Spare
5 CR10
5 Transf. Prot.Trip Start BFP on B-Side
6
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC13 6
7
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC14 7
8 CR11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC15 8 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
9
CR12
9 Trip phase L2, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
10
CR13 10 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
A-Side Breaker Q0 open OC17
12
13
A-Side Breaker Q0 closed OC18
14 CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side
Legend:
54
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
55
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
OR
37
Central Unit
Block Differential prot. DIFTRA Block
10 01 129205 Trafo Prot.
Inrush Input DIFTRA TRIP BP Output (configurable)
DIFTRA Inrush TRIP to
11 High Set Input
02 129605 229105
L1L2L3
01
DIFTRA High Set DIFTRA TRIP L1
12 03 129610
DIFTRA 229110
DIFTRA TRIP L2
02 Group1 Group2
Mech. prot TRIP 1 Mech
229115
DIFTRA TRIP L3
03 (94-1) (94-2)
05 17 229120 04
TRIP1
229805 DIFTRA Inrush
05 03
DIFTRA Stabiliz.
Mech. prot Alarm 1 229810 06
06 18 OR not used 04
11840_GP_IN_1 35
38 not used 05
OR
36
Mech. prot TRIP 2 Mech
07 19 A- Side
TRIP2
TH Block TH TRIP
07
128205 228105 07
Mech. prot Alarm 2
20 TH TH Start not used 09
08 228705 08
11845_GP_IN_2 OR
28 09
OCINST Block OCINST TRIP
126205 226105 10
04 OCINST 226705
OCINST Start
11
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 12
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
13
OCINV Block OCINV TRIP
113205 213105 14
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
15
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
05 121205 221105 16
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
17
55
OR
35
OR
30
B- Side
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 26
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
27
07
OCINV Block OCINV TRIP
113205 213105 28
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
29
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
06 121205 221105 30
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
31
OR
31
CHKI3PH
A-Side 224605 picked up 56
CHKI3PH
CHKI3PH
B-Side 224605 picked up
57
CHKI3PH
Legend :
CHKU3PH
225605 picked up 58
CHKU3PH A =Transformer primary side
56
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
8 7
9 CR03 8
Mechanic Protection TRIP 1 OC05
Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
OC06 Tripping relay (94-1) Trip CB A/BSide
Mechanic Protection Alarm 1
11 10
12 CR04
11 Spare
13 CR05
Mechanic Protection TRIP 2 OC07 12 Spare
14
OC08 13
Mechanic Protection Alarm 2 15 CR06
14 Remote Trip 2 to B-Side
16
CR07 Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
17 Tripping relay (94-2) Trip CB A/BSide
A-Side Breaker Q0 Manual Close Command OC09
18
1 1
Block Transformer Diff. Protection OC10 B D
2
2
Transformer Diff. Inrush input OC11
CR08 3 Remote Trip 1 to B-Side
3
Transformer Diff. high set OC12 CR09
4 4 Spare
5 CR10
5 Transf. Prot.Trip Start BFP on B-Side
6
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC13 6
7
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC14 7
8 CR11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC15 8 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
9
CR12
9 Trip phase L2, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
10
CR13 10 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
A-Side Breaker Q0 open OC17
12
13
A-Side Breaker Q0 closed OC18
14 CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side
57
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
58
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
OR
Q0 ON
37
11 AND Central Unit
Trafo Prot.
12 not used 39 BP Output (configurable)
Mech. prot TRIP 1
Back-Up TRIP to
Mech
05 17 TRIP1 (94-1) (94-2)
03
Mech. prot Alarm 1
06 18 OR
11840_GP_IN_1
38
35
Mech. prot TRIP 2 Mech
07 19 TRIP2 not used 04
Mech. prot Alarm 2 not used 05
08 20
OR
36
A- Side
11845_GP_IN_2
TH Block TH TRIP
07
128205 228105 07
TH 228705
TH Start
08 not used 09
OR
28 09
OCINST Block OCINST TRIP
126205 226105 10
04 OCINST 226705
OCINST Start
11
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 12
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
13
OCINV Block OCINV TRIP
113205 213105 14
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
15
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
05 121205 221105 16
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
17
55
OR
35
OR
30
B- Side
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 26
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
27
07
OCINV Block OCINV TRIP
113205 213105 28
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
29
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
06 121205 221105 30
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
31
OR
31
CHKI3PH
A-Side 224605 picked up 56
CHKI3PH
CHKI3PH
B-Side 224605 picked up
57
CHKI3PH
Legend :
CHKU3PH
225605 picked up 58
CHKU3PH A =Transformer primary side
59
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
8 7
9 CR03 8
Mechanic Protection TRIP 1 OC05
Transf. Back-Up. TRIP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
OC06 Tripping relay (94-1) Trip CB A/BSide
Mechanic Protection Alarm 1
11 10
12 CR04
11 Spare
13 CR05
Mechanic Protection TRIP 2 OC07 12 Spare
14
OC08 13
Mechanic Protection Alarm 2 15 CR06
14 Remote Trip 2 to B-Side
16
CR07 Transf. Back-Up TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
17 Tripping relay (94-2) Trip CB A/BSide
A-Side Breaker Q0 Manual Close Command OC09
18
1 1
Spare OC10 B D
2
2
Spare OC11
CR08 3 Remote Trip 1 to B-Side
3
Spare OC12 CR09
4 4 Spare
5 CR10
5 Transf. Prot.Trip Start BFP on B-Side
6
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC13 6
7
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC14 7
8 CR11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC15 8 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
9
CR12
9 Trip phase L2, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
10
CR13 10 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
A-Side Breaker Q0 open OC17
12
13
A-Side Breaker Q0 closed OC18
14 CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side
Legend:
60
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Power Systems
Brown Boveri Strasse 72
CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland
Phone +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77
E-mail substation.automation@ch.abb.com
www.abb.com/substationautomation
12.1.1.1. Overview
The Bay protection - Configuration dialog lists all the bay units,
which are licensed for bay protection functions. The list does not
therefore include bay units that are only used for busbar
protection.
Click the left mouse button on a bay unit to select it and then the
Continue button or simply double click on the bay unit. This
opens the dialog Select protection function - <Name> for the
respective bay.
12-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
There are buttons on the right for each of the actually available
protection functions. The first is always the binary output function
BP output (see Section 12.1.1.3.4)
12-12
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Copy
Creates a copy of the protection function according to the
following rules:
A copy cannot be in the same parameter set as the original.
The input signals of a copy are the same as those of the
original and cannot be changed.
Only defined parameters of a copy can be configured. All
other parameters are taken from the original.
Delete
The instance of the specific protection function is deleted
together with all the settings that the user has made up to that
point.
If the function being deleted has connections to other protection
functions, an error message appears instructing you to first
delete the connections.
Properties
This opens a dialog with all the functions settings. Double
clicking on the functions symbol opens the same dialog.
12-14
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Mode
Currently active mode.
Configuration: The dialog is in the protection function
configuration or setting mode.
Measurements: The dialog was started in the measurement
display mode.
Test: Not implemented in this version.
Read-Write: The user can edit and save settings.
Read only: The user cannot edit settings.
Statistics
Configured functions: Number of instances created by the
user for this bay unit. The maximum
number is 128.
Available parameters: The number of memory locations
available for protection function
settings in the entire system.
Used parameters: Number of protection function settings
used by the present bay unit.
12-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
The Output from function tab lists all the protection function
instances set for the particular bay unit together with the number
of the instance. Upon selecting a protection function in the list on
the left by clicking the left mouse button on it, its binary output
signals appear on the right of the dialog.
The columns in the list of output signals signify the following:
Channel: Unique No. of the output signal
Inv.: Check this box to invert the signal
Signal text: Output signal name
12-18
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-20
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-22
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-24
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-26
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-28
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Binary inputs:
None = no simulation
Active = True simulated
Inactive = False simulated
12-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
T1 T2 T3 T4
T5 T6 T7
The seven sequences are active during the maximum time set
for Max. length [s].
Delay after
trigger
12-30
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Following the trigger impulse, the sequence lasts for the time set
for Delay after trigger [s]. This delay setting permits the
simulation of, for example, circuit-breaker operating times.
Sequences 6 and 7:
Sequence 1: Off-load voltage
Off-load voltage
Sequence 5:
CB poles L1, L2, L3 open
Sequence 2: Trigger:
Ground fault L1E Auto-reclosure Close CB
Trigger:
Distance prot. Trip CB 1P Sequence 4:
Ground fault L1E
Trigger:
Distance prot. Trip CB 3P
Sequence 3:
CB pole L1 open
Trigger:
Auto-reclosure Close CB
12-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Simulation
status
Sequences 6 and 7 stop at the
maximum sequence length
setting ( O.K.)
Sequences not
executed
Simulation results:
GREEN: Trigger configured and operated.
RED: Trigger configured but has not
Sequences stopped operated.
by the trigger signal BLUE: Simulation (sequence) not executed.
Sequences stopped
because of timeout
12-32
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
The default setting for the last two functions (directional definite
time overcurrrent and directional IDMT) is busbar side, but if a
distance protection function has been configured, its setting (line
or busbar side) applies for the directional overcurrent functions
as well.
12-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.1. Application
Distance protection for the high-speed discriminative protection
of long or short overhead lines or cables, double-circuit lines,
heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and what are re-
ferred to as short-zone lines.
The protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded
systems, systems with Petersen coils or to ungrounded systems.
All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase
faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high-resistance
ground faults.
The protection remains stable in the presence of power swings
and reversal of energy direction. Switching onto an existing fault
results in instantaneous tripping of the circuit-breaker.
The distance function can also act as backup protection for the
power transformer and neighboring lines. Most of the logic
described in this Section (e.g. the transmission of signals) is not
used for these applications.
12.2.2. Features
Overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon charac-
teristic)
Directional or non-directional (configurable) underimpedance
starters
5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics)
Polygon characteristic with adjustable load discrimination
6 concurrently computed measuring loops
(L1E, L2E, L3E, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)
Definite time overcurrent backup protection also applicable
for protecting short zones (T zone in 1 breaker schemes)
VT supervision
Power-swing blocking
Tripping logics for:
Switch-onto-fault protection
Overreaching zone
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed and communications channel failure)
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed, communications channel failure and reversal of
energy direction)
Blocking scheme (also for reversal of energy direction)
12-34
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Single-phase trip
Overcurrent backup trip (O/C backup)
Switch-onto-fault trip
Trip with transfer trip signal
Short-zone protection trip
Time 2nd step
Timer
Zone 2 time
Zone 3 time
Zone 4 time
Final zone time
Measurement
Overreaching measurement
Forwards measurement
Reverse measurement
Weak infeed trip
Distance protection blocked
Power-swing blocking
VT supervision
Delayed VT supervision
Communication send
PLC boost
Memory frequency deviation
12.2.3.4. Measurements
Impedance loop L1E
Impedance loop L2E
Impedance loop L3E
Impedance loop L1L2
Impedance loop L2L3
Impedance loop L3L1
12-36
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.4.1. General
1) Either one or other of these two inputs (I0, I0P) can be used but not both.
12.2.4.2. Starting
12-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.4.3. Measurement
12-38
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.4.4. VT supervision
12-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text
Delay Def
Meas Main
Meas Oreach
Meas Fward
Meas Bward
Weak Infeed
Dist Blocked
DelDistBlk
Power Swing
VTSup
VTSup Delay
Com Send
Com Boost
Freq dev
12-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.5.1. General
Text Explanation
ParSet 1..4 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a
particular function is active.
CT Neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current
direction):
Choice: Bus side
Line side
Ref. Length Reactance (secondary value) to be used as reference
length of the line.
U input Indicates the first VT input assigned to the three phase
voltages. Fixed setting Channel 5 of the A/D module.
I input Indicates the first CT input assigned to the three phase
currents. Fixed setting Channel 1 of the A/D module.
I0 input, Indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current.
This is used for
I0P input
the external acquisition of the neutral current of the line
or
the neutral current of the parallel circuit of a double-
circuit line. Fixed setting Channel 4 of the analog input
module.
I O/C backup Phase current pick-up setting of the backup overcurrent
unit. The function is blocked when set to zero.
Delay O/C Tripping delay of the O/C backup function.
backup
Time PS block Determines the maximum blocking time of the power
swing blocking function. The power swing blocking
function is blocked when set to zero.
12-42
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.5.2. Starting
Text Explanation
StartMode Choice: UZ (underimpedance)
I > (overcurrent)
PhaseSelMode Phase preference for cross-country faults in systems with
Petersen coils and ungrounded systems:
Choice: Solidly grounded
L1L3L2 (L1) cyclic
L3L1L2 (L3) cyclic
L1L3L2 acyclic
L1L2L3 acyclic
L3L2L1 acyclic
L3L1L2 acyclic
L2L1L3 acyclic
L2L3L1 acyclic
Directional OR
GndFaultMode Method of detecting ground faults:
Choice: I0 (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax)
I0 OR U0 (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax)
OR (UE>3U0min)
I0(I2) (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2)
I0(I2) OR U0 (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2)
OR (UE>3U0min)
IStart Pick-up setting of the overcurrent starters (only effective
providing starting mode set to I>)
Imin Setting of the low current check feature for enabling the
protection.
3I0min Neutral current (3I0) setting for detecting ground faults.
3U0min Neutral voltage (3U0) setting for detecting ground faults.
XA Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the
tripping direction.
XB Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the re-
straint direction.
RA Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the trip-
ping direction.
RB Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the re-
straint direction.
RLoad Resistive reach for avoiding load encroachment.
AngleLoad Limit phase-angle for avoiding load encroachment.
Uweak Phase-to-neutral setting for detecting a weak infeed or a
dead line for enabling manually energizing the line.
The function is blocked when set to zero.
12-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
27
XA
Direc-
tional
OR
Load angle
RLoad
-RLoad RA
R
-RB 27
Directional
(tripping direction)
-XB
12.2.5.3. Measurement
Text Explanation
Del (Def) Operating time of the final stage (starter).
K0m Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a
parallel circuit (ratio of the mutual impedance to three
times the positive-sequence impedance);
Z m0 /( 3 x Z1 ) . The mutual impedance is not taken into
account for a setting of zero.
K0mAngle Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor
for a parallel circuit Arg Z m0 /( 3x Z1 ) .
ILoad The inclination of the characteristic changes from 7 to
14 when the load current exceeds the setting of ILoad.
ILoad = 0.01..1.99 IN Switches as described
ILoad = 0 Constant inclination of 14
ILoad = 2 Constant inclination of 7
UminFault Minimum voltage at which the fault voltage is used for
determining fault direction.
12-44
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
MemDirMode Procedure to be followed after decay of the memory
voltage and no voltage is available for measurement:
Blocks
Trips
Conditional trip;
Only trips, if the directions during the present and the
preceding times steps are in opposition.
DefDirMode Response at the end of the final time step (definitive
time):
Non-direct.: Trips for faults in both directions
Forwards: Trips only for faults in the forwards
direction
BlockZ1 Zone 1 measurement blocking:
off
on
X(n) Pick-up line reactance for Zone (n):
X < 0 for restraint direction
X = 0 disables the zone (Zone 1 cannot be disabled)
R(n) Pick-up line resistance for Zone (n); the sign must be the
same as for X (n).
RR(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for
phase faults; the sign must be the same as for X (n).
RRE(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for
ground faults; the sign must be the same as for X (n).
K0(n) Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for
E/F's in Zone (n); (Z 0 Z1 )/(3x Z1 ) .
K0Angle(n) Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor
for E/F's in Zone (n); Arg (Z 0 Z1 )/(3x Z1 ) .
Delay(n) Operating time for Zone (n).
X(BACK) Pick-up line reactance for the reverse zone:
X = 0 Zone disabled.
R(BACK) Pick-up line resistance for the reverse zone.
RR(BACK) Resistive reach for phase faults in the reverse zone.
RRE(BACK) Resistive reach for ground faults in the reverse zone.
12-45
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
27
X(n)
7
14
-RR(n)/2 27
-RRE(n)/2
12-46
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
RRE(BACK)/2
27
RR(BACK)/2
X(BACK)/8
R
-RRE(BACK) -RR(BACK) -R(BACK)
14
-X(BACK)
27
S4
S3
S2
S1
SR
12-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.5.4. VT supervision
Text Explanation
VTSupBlkMode off Function disabled
ZeroSeq [U0 I0 ]
NegSeq [U2 I2 ]
Zero NegSeq [(U0 I0 )+(U2 I2 )]
Special [U2 (I0 +I2 )]
VTSupBlkDel Delayed blocking of the distance function (12 s) for
operation of the VT supervision.
off - immediate blocking
on - delayed blocking
VTSupDebDel Delay (1 s) for resetting blocking by the VT supervision.
off - immediate reset
on - delayed reset
U0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral voltage (U0) for VT
supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/3 or
200/3.
U2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the negative sequence voltage (U2) for
VT supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/3 or
200/3.
I0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral current (I0) for VT
supervision.
I2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the NPS current (I2) for VT supervision.
Text Explanation
ChgMeasDir Input for changing the direction of measurement.
Ext Blk Dist Input for disabling the distance protection function:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).
Ext UZ Blk Input for blocking the underimpedance starters:
F: - underimpedance starters enabled
T: - underimpedance starters disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).
12-48
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
Ext Blk PSB External disable for the power-swing blocking function:
F: - power-switch blocking enabled
T: - power-switch blocking disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Blk O/C External disable of the backup overcurrent function:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
DeadLine Line de-energized signal (auxiliary contact on the circuit-
breaker when the VTs are on the busbar):
F: - input not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Manual close Circuit-breaker manual close signal:
F: - input not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
ZExtension External zone extension control signal:
F: - external zone extension disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Isol Open Isolator open signal for activating the short-zone logic
and protection (T section in 1 breaker schemes):
F: - disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Com Rec Input for PLC signal from the remote station:
F: - input not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Com Fail Input for PLC failure signal:
F: - input not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
1PolAR Single-phase trip enable (used in conjunction with the
autoreclosure function):
F: - three-phase trip only
T: - single and three-phase trip (depending on type of
fault)
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
12-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
ExtBlkSOTF Input for blocking the tripping condition for the switch-onto-
fault logic:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
NOTE: The input does not disable the switch-onto-fault
starting signal.
ExtBlkHF Input for blocking a received PLC signal (controlled, for
example, by a sensitive E/F scheme using the same PLC
channel):
F: - input not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
ZExtensionAR Input for enabling the overreaching zone by the
autoreclosure function:
F: - zone extension by the autoreclosure function
disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
ExtBlock Z1 Input for blocking measurement in the first zone:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
12-50
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
Start L1+L2+L3 General distance protection starting signal (OR logic for
all starting signals excepting weak infeed').
Start L1L2L3 General distance protection starting signal (OR logic for
all starting signals including weak infeed').
Start L1L2L3 Aux
Start L1 Distance protection L1 phase starting signal
(including weak infeed').
Start L1 Aux
Start L2 Distance protection L2 phase starting signal
(including weak infeed').
Start L2 Aux
Start L3 Distance protection L3 phase starting signal
(including weak infeed').
Start L3 Aux
Start E Distance protection E/F starting signal (U0 or I0). Only
generated together with a phase starter.
Start E Aux
Start I0 Neutral current starting signal (I0).
Start U0 Neutral voltage starting signal (U0).
Start OC Overcurrent starting signal.
Start UZ Underimpedance starting signal.
Start O/C Backup overcurrent pick-up signal.
Start SOTF Enabling signal for the switch-onto-fault protection.
Start 1ph Indicates that the distance protection was started by a
single phase.
Trip CB General circuit-breaker tripping signal. This signal is
disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the
exception of a trip by the backup overcurrent protection.
Trip L1L2L3 General tripping signal. This signal is not disabled while
a blocking signal is being applied.
Trip L1L2L3 Aux
Trip CB L1 Circuit-breaker L1 phase trip signal.
This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being
applied with the exception of a trip by the backup
overcurrent protection.
Trip CB L2 Circuit-breaker L2 phase trip signal.
This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being
applied with the exception of a trip by the backup
overcurrent protection.
Trip CB L3 Circuit-breaker L3 phase trip signal.
This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being
applied with the exception of a trip by the backup
overcurrent protection.
12-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
Trip CB 3P Three-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a
blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a
trip by the backup overcurrent protection.
Trip CB 1P Single-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a
blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a
trip by the backup overcurrent protection.
Trip O/C Backup overcurrent trip signal.
Trip SOTF Switch-onto-fault trip signal.
Trip Com Signal for tripping either enabled by the receipt of a
permissive signal or the non-receipt of a blocking signal.
(This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being
applied.)
Trip Stub 'Short-zone protection trip signal.
Delay >= 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2 or higher.
Delay 1 Signal for starting in Zone 1.
Delay 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2.
Delay 3 Signal for starting in Zone 3.
Delay 4 Signal for starting in Zone 4 (excepting when Zone 4 is
being used as an overreaching zone).
Delay Def Signal for starting in the final zone.
Meas Main Measurement by the distance function (Zones 1, 2, 3, 4
or the final zone).
Meas Oreach Measurement in the distance protection overreach zone.
Meas Fward Measurement by the distance protection in the forwards
direction.
Meas Bward Measurement by the distance protection in the reverse
direction (reverse zone).
Weak Infeed Tripping by the weak infeed function.
Dist Blocked Signal indicating that the distance protection is blocked.
DelDistBlk Signal delayed by 12 s indicating that the distance
protection is blocked.
Power Swing Power-swing blocking function picked up.
VTSup VT supervision picked up.
VTSup Delay Delayed operation of the VT supervision after 12 s.
Com Send Signal generated when a transfer trip signal is
transmitted.
Com Boost Signal for boosting PLC transmitting power.
Freq dev Signal indicating a deviation of the memory voltage fre-
quency.
12-52
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
ComMode Type of transfer tripping scheme:
off
PUTT NONDIR
PUTT FWD
PUTT OR2
POTT
BLOCK OR
TripMode Type of tripping (single or three-phase):
1PhTrip - single-phase tripping (for single-
phase autoreclosure)
3PhTrip - three-phase tripping in all cases
3PhTripDel3 - single-phase tripping (for single-
phase autoreclosure) up to the end
of Delay (3) then three-phase
tripping
SOTFMode Operating mode of the switch-onto-fault function:
off
Non-dir - non-directional underimpedance
starting (recommended setting)
Forward OR2 - directional with overreaching (Zone
2, if overreaching disabled) or
- non-directional after decay of any
memory voltage
SOTF10sec Enables the 10 s delay for the switch-onto-fault function:
off (t = 200 ms)
on (t = 10 s)
Weak Enables Weak infeed logic for the PUTT or POTT
transfer tripping modes (Uweak must also be set):
off
on
Unblock Enables deblocking logic:
off
on (only suitable for PLC)
Echo Echo logic enable for the POTT transfer tripping mode:
off
on
12-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
TransBl Enables Transient blocking logic (stabilization for
reversal of power direction on double-circuit lines) for the
POTT and BLOCK OR (overreaching blocking scheme)
transfer tripping modes:
off
on
t1Block Waiting time for signal receive for the BLOCK OR
(overreaching blocking scheme).
t1TransBl Time 1 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode.
Delay for faults after a fault was detected in the reverse
direction.
t2TransBl Time 2 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. The
logic remains enabled for the time t2 after a fault was
detected in the reverse direction.
t1EvolFaults Time for discriminating evolving faults (three-phase trip
for evolving faults during this time setting)
12-54
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.6.1. General
The first parameter in the sub-menu General is Ref length. It is
used to display the fault distance when the function trips and has
no influence of the protection function itself. The parameter
states the reactance of the reference length (in secondary /ph
per unit length) and may be set to display km, miles, percent line
length etc., i.e.
Xmeas.
Distance =
ref. length
e.g.:
a) To display fault distance in km
Secondary reactance per km 0.2 /phase
Ref. length = 0.2 /phase
12.2.6.2. Starters
The distance function provides for two methods of starting, i.e.
overcurrent or underimpedance. The desired method is selected
by appropriately setting the parameter StartMode in the
STARTERS sub-menu.
Depending on the setting of the parameter DefDirMode, a
starter can also trip on its own after the time Delay (Def).
12-55
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-56
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
XA
AngleLoad
- R
RLoad R
RB RLoad
XB
12-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
U
Z set /ph
2x(IB max +IA )
where:
Zset maximum value of the impedance, i.e. the maximum
value of the expression:
XA 2 + RA 2 or XB2 + RB2
U lowest phase voltage of the healthy phases for an
ground fault on one phase (U = 0.85 x min. system
voltage). The factor 0.85 takes account of a negligibly
small zero sequence source impedance.
Uv lowest phase-to-phase system voltage
1.25 safety factor
2 factor, which takes account of the fact that phase cur-
rents and not phase-to-phase currents are used.
12-58
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.6.3. Measurement
All the settings for the impedance measuring zones are to be
found in the MEASUREMENT sub-menu.
12-60
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Z 3 = 0.85 (a + k b2 )
Z2 = 0.85 (a + k b1 )
b2
Z 1 = 0.85 a
b1
Z R = 1.2 a
a b
A B C
where:
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 impedance reach of the various zones
(/ph)
ZOR impedance reach of the overreaching zone
(/ph)
k1 factor to take the apparent increase of line im-
pedance seen by a relay due to an intermedi-
ate infeed into account
a, b impedance of the corresponding section of line
()
A B IA' + IB' C
1 2 3 4
D
5
~ IA'
~
12-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
IA ' + IB '
k= 1
IA
where:
IA' maximum fault current possible
IB' minimum fault current possible
1...5 distance relays
12-62
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
27
7
14
-X/8 R RR RRE
R
-RR/2
27
-RRE/2
12-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
phase-to-phase fault: R = RF / 2
three-phase fault: R = RF / 3
R
F
R R
R F F
F
R
F
12-64
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Load discrimination
The load area defined by the underimpedance parameters
RLoad and AngleLoad is taken into account by starting and
measuring characteristics. The distance function can only trip, if
the fault impedance lies within the underimpedance starting
characteristic.
X
S4
S3
S2
S1
SR
Starting
NOTE that the load impedance area is only formed when the
underimpedance starter (UZ) is in operation. It does not exist
when starting is provided by the overcurrent starter (OC).
12-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-66
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
X
27
XA
Load angle
-RLoad RLoad RA
R
-RB 27 (In tripping
direction)
-XB
12-68
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.6.6. VT supervision
The parameters for setting the VT supervision function are
located in the sub-menu VT SUPERVISON. One of four
different operating modes can be chosen using VTSupMode.
The function processes zero and negative-sequence
components, which are either used on their own ('ZeroSeq and
NegSeq') or combined ('Zero*NegSeq and Spec').
ZeroSeq [U I ]
0 0
NegSeq [U I ]
2 2
Zero*NegSeq [(U I )+ (U I )]
0 0 2 2
Spec [U (I + I ) ]
2 0 2
12-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Recommended setting
PUTT NONDIR
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (non-directional)
Weak enables the weak infeed logic.
PUTT FWD
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (in line direction)
No other parameters.
12-70
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
PUTT OR2
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (overreaching
zone/Zone 2)
Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications
channel failure.
POTT
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping
Weak enables the weak infeed logic.
Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications
channel failure.
Echo enables the echo logic.
TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy
direction logic.
t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy
direction logic.
BLOCK OR
Blocking scheme
TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
t1Block time allowed for the receipt of a PLC signal
t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy
direction logic.
t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy
direction logic.
TripMode
Depending on the setting of the parameter TripMode, tripping is
either phase-selective, controlled by the binary input 1PolAR
(for 1phTrip), always three-phase (for 3phTrip) or three-phase
after the time Delay (3) (for 3phTripDel3).
SOTF Mode
Access is gained to the switch-onto-fault logic settings by
selecting the parameter SOTF Mode. The alternatives
presented are whether the switch-onto-fault logic should trip on
the basis of the non-directional underimpedance starters or the
overreaching zone.
12-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
SOTF 10 sec
The parameter SOTF10sec determines whether the
undervoltage function and the binary input Deadline are
enabled after 10 s (on) or 200 ms (off). off indicates switching
onto a fault after fast autoreclosure (Fast AR). Tripping in this
case is thus based on the decisions of the starters alone.
t1EvolFaults
The setting of the parameter t1EvolFaults determines the time
during which the detection of an evolving fault causes a three-
phase trip.
ChgMeasDir
Applying a signal to this input reverses the direction of meas-
urement for the entire distance protection function (all zones).
12-72
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Ext UZ Blk
This input blocks the underimpedance starters, the neutral
voltage starter (U0), the measurement for Weak and the reverse
measurement. The overcurrent starters (OC) remain in
operation.
Deadline
The signal applied to this input is needed by the switch-onto-fault
logic to indicate to the distance function that the line is dead
before the circuit-breaker is closed. It is used for the switch-onto-
fault logic providing the VTs are on the busbars.
Manual Close
Prior to manually closing the circuit-breaker, this signal enables
the switch-onto-fault logic and blocks the VT supervision
function.
ZExtension, ZExtensionAR
The overreaching logic permits instantaneous tripping within the
overreaching zone. It is enabled via the binary input ZExtension
or ZExtensionAR.
For this purpose, the output ZExtension of the autoreclosure
function is connected to the input ZExtensionAR.
Isol open
This input is required by the STUB protection to ascertain
whether an isolator is open or not.
12-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
ComRec
This input is needed for the external signal ComRec (signal
received by PLC, optical fiber link or point-to-point radio).
ComFail
This input signals to the protection that the PLC channel has
failed.
1PolAR
This input permits single-phase tripping to take place and is used
in conjunction with single or three-phase autoreclosure schemes.
Refer to the Section Autoreclosure for the connection to the
autoreclosure function.
ExtBlkSOTF
This input is needed in cases where the switch-onto-fault logic is
not enabled after an autoreclosure.
Refer to the Section Autoreclosure for the connection to the
autoreclosure function.
ExtBlkHF
This input blocks the reception of an intertripping signal. It is
used for coordinating communication channel signals when in a
solidly grounded system, the distance protection and the E/F
protection use the same channel. It must be connected to the
RecBlk signal of the ground fault function.
ExtBlock Z1
This input blocks measurement in zone 1.
12.2.7.1. Starters
12-74
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
START
Imax = highest
value of
IL1, IL2, IL3
N
Imax > Istart
Y
set log.
signal "ph" (L1, L2, L3)
all
N
phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3
[(IE 3I0min)
AND (IE 0.25 Imax)] N
AND/OR
(UE 3U0min)
set log.
signal "E"
HEST 955038 FL
END
12-76
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
START
Y
Y
Uph1 Uph2
UPh Z = ---------------------
Z = ----------- Iph1 Iph2
2 x IPh
N Z < Z Start
Z < Z Start
J
Y
Set temp.
Set temp. signals Ph1,
signals Ph, Ph2
E
N
N All Ph-Ph
All Ph-0 loops
loops
Y
Y
Loop = Selectivity
Phase selection conditions
N
Z < ZStart
Log.signals =
temp.signals
END
12-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
US
ZS = (uncompensated)
2 IS
UT
ZT = (uncompensated)
2 IT
12-78
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
UL 2 UL 3
ZL 2L 3 =
IL 2 IL 3
UL 3 UL1
ZL 3L1 =
IL 3 IL1
12-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-80
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
where
k0: zero-sequence compensation factor for Z0
k 0 = (Z 0 Z 1 ) 3Z 1
12-82
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
START
Overcurrent
starter
Overcurrent N
starter
Loop =
phase selection
Z calculation
(ph-0 compensated)
Z Start , Z 1-4 , (Z OR ),
Z Back , direction
N
Trip
Signalling,
fault location,
Z(loop)
N
t > 1 periode
Stoping
the timers
Y
Change to
processing
Change to periode II
processing
periode II
END
HEST 955035 FL
12-84
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
START
Solidly grounded N
system AND
(I > starting active) Select phases
Calculat six Z N
(Ph-0 compensated) Ph-E
Y
Selectivity
conditions Calculat three
Calculate Z Ph-0 Z Ph-Ph
Reset Y
conditions
N
Trip
Signals,
Fault location,
Z(loop)
Stop timers
END
12-86
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-88
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.7.3. VT supervision
The purpose of the VT supervision function is to monitor the VT
leads with respect to asymmetrical short-circuits and open-
circuits. An m.c.b. can be included for three-phase VT short-
circuits and arranged to block the protection via a separate
optocoupler input.
The input variables monitored by the VT supervision function are
the three voltages UR, US, and UT and the three currents IL1, IL2,
IL2. The zero-sequence (U0, I0) and negative-sequence (U2, I2)
components are calculated for both the three-phase voltage and
three-phase current systems.
3U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
3
3U2 = UL1 + UL2 a2 + UL3 a a = 0 . 5 + j = 1/ 120
2
3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
3I2 = IL1 + IL2 a2 + IL3 a
L1
L2
L3
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
12-89
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-90
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-91
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-92
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-93
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
VTSUP
SUPBL
SOTF
Binary input data of the distance protection function and the input/output unit
ZE
TRANSB
UNBLOC
PUTTRE
PUTSEN
POTTRE
POTSEN
BLOCRE
BLOSEN
HFSEN
TRIP
12-94
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
EXTBLK_DIST
100
>=1 DISTBL
PSBBLOCK
VTFAIL
12-95
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-96
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Uweak_L1
Uweak_L2
&
Uweak_L3T
CREL_L1
CREL_L2
CREL_L3
>=1
DeadLine
& 10000
SOTF_10S
>=1
&
200
MANCL_DIST
START_SOTF
1000
& SOTF
SOTF_INI
12-97
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-98
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
ZE_FOR_DIST
>=1
AR_ZE
&
RSFF
S
START_L1L2L3 BIT_TRIP_ZE
R Q
12-99
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
P_UNBLOCK
&
HFREC
&
20 BIT_UNBL
HFFAIL
20
12-100
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
t = Com Rec : Trip (PUTT NONDIR) = Com Rec * (Start L1+L2+L3 + Weak)
Trip (PUTT FWD) = Com Rec * Meas Fward
Trip (PUTT OR2) = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach
Send = Meas Main
PUTT_NONDIR
>=1
PUTT_ON
PUTT_FWD
PUTT_OR
&
DELAY3
PUTT_SEND
MEAS_MAIN
START_L1L2L3
12-101
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-102
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-103
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
PUTT_NONDIR
&
>= 1
START_L1L2L3
&
PUTT_FWD
UZ_FWD
PUTT_OR
& &
MEAS_OR2
DELAY2
>= 1
M_OWN
BIT_UNBL >= 1
HFREC >= 1
TRIP_PUTT
& &
P_WEAK
100
000
UWEAK_L1_PUTT
&
UWEAK_L2
UWEAK_L2_PUTT
&
UWEAK_L3
>= 1
5000 UWEAK_L3_PUTT
12-104
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
&
MEAS_OR2 >=1
BIT_TBE
DELAY2
POTT_SEND
&
&
P_ECHO
MEAS_BWD >= 1
100
M_OWN
&
EXTBLK_HF
HFREC
&
150
&
12-105
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-106
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
BIT_TBE
DELAY2
>=1
TRIP_POTT
M_OWN >= 1
EXTBLK_HF
MEAS_BWD
200 &
UWEAK_L1
20 >= 1 UWEAK_POTT
200
P_WEAK
UWEAK_L1_POTT
UWEAK_L2 >= 1
5000
UWEAK_L3
&
UWEAK_L2_POTT
&
UWEAK_L3_POTT
12-107
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-108
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
P_BLOCK BLOCK_ON
&
HFFAIL
&
DELAY2
>=1
MEAS_OR2
MEAS_BWD BLOCK_SEND
100
BIT_TBE &
12-109
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
P_BLOCK &
HFFAIL
MEAS_OR2
T1 & TRIP_BLOCK
P_T1_BLOCK
HFREC
DELAY2 >= 1
M_OWN
BIT_TBE
TBA_BLOCK
&
12-110
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-111
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
A2 B2
~ ~
A2 B2
~ ~
A2 B2
12-112
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
t = 0 s:
A1 B1 TBA_BLOCK
>= 1
T1
TBA_POTT
&
~ ~ MEAS_BWD
BIT_TBE
>= 1
T2 100
A2 B2
t = signal received
A1 B1 TBA_BLOCK
>= 1
T1
TBA_POTT
&
~ ~ MEAS_BWD
BIT_TBE
>= 1
T2 100
A2 B2
t = CB open:
TBA_BLOCK
>= 1
A1 B1 TBA_POTT
T1
&
MEAS_BWD
>= 1 BIT_TBE
~ ~
T2 100
A2 B2
12-113
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-114
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
PUTT_ON
>=1
BIT_HF_ON
POTT_ON
BLOCK_ON
&
PUTT_SEND
>=1
POTT_SEND
BLOCK_SEND
HF_SEND
DISTBL
UWEAK_L1
>=1 &
UWEAK_L2
&
UWEAK_L3
2000
>=1
HF_BOOST
START_L1L2L3
12-115
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-116
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.7.5.19. TRIP 1
PHSEL_L1
>=1 BIT_L1
UWEAK_L1_PUTT
UWEAK_L1_POTT
>=1 SIG_L1
START_L1
PHSEL_L2
>=1 BIT_L2
UWEAK_L2_PUTT
UWEAK_L2_POTT
>=1
SIG_L2
START_L2
PHSEL_L3
>=1 BIT_L3
UWEAK_L3_PUTT
UWEAK_L3_POTT
>=1
SIG_L3
START_L3
>=1
P_L1L2L3
OC_L1L2L3
12-117
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-118
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.2.7.5.20. TRIP2
BIT_L1
&
BIT_L2 >=1
BIT_L2
&
BIT_L3
BIT_L3
&
BIT_L1
P_L1L2L3
&
&
DL1L2T
P_T1_TRIP Tim
&
4 BIT_3P
>=1
&
OC_D
SOTF
TRIP_STUB
TRIP_3PH
AR_1POL_IN
12-119
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.7.5.21. TRIP3
SOTF
>=1
ZE_FOR_DIST >=1
AR_ZE
&
RSFF
MEAS_OR2 S
START_L1L2L3
R Q
TRIP_STUB
OC_D
TRIP_POTT
TRIP_BLOCK &
&
HF_OFF
50ms >=1
BIT_3P >=1
BIT_L1
>=1 & D
50ms
BIT_L2
>=1 &
50ms
BIT_L3
&
DL1
&
DL2
&
& DL3
DISTBL
REL_DH
12-120
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-121
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.2.7.5.22. TRIP4
REL_DH
&
DH
DL2
DL3
D3PH
&
&
>=1
&
8 D1PH
&
12-122
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
E1 U E2
U cos
U U cos
I
E1 E2
12-123
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-124
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.3.1. Application
General purpose over- and undercurrent function for
phase fault protection
backup protection or
for monitoring a minimum current.
12.3.2. Features
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement
Maximum respectively minimum value detection in the three-
phase mode
Detection of inrush currents
12.3.3.4. Measurements
Current amplitude
12-125
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-126
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.
All current I/P's may be selected.
BlockInp Input for blocking the function.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal
Setting I-Setting
The current setting I-Setting must be sufficiently high to avoid
any risk of false tripping or false signals under normal load
conditions, but should be low enough to detect the lowest fault
current that can occur. The margin which has to be allowed
between the maximum short-time load current and the setting
must allow for:
the tolerance on the current setting
the reset ratio
The maximum short-time load current has to be determined
according to the power system conditions and must take
switching operations and load surges into account.
12-127
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
I-Setting
IN
Delay
0 t
CurrentInp
An interposing CT in the input is essential for current settings
lower than 0.2 IN.
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent
function. It is set according to the grading table for all the over-
current units on the power system. The zone of protection of the
overcurrent function under consideration extends to the location
of the next downstream overcurrent relay.
Should the downstream relay fail to clear a fault, the overcurrent
function trips slightly later in a backup role.
12-128
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Setting MaxMin
This parameter enables the following operating modes to be
selected:
MIN (3ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current also
falls below the setting. This setting is not per-
mitted for single-phase measurement.
MIN (1ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current falls
below the setting.
MAX (3ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current also
exceeds the setting. This setting is not permitted
for single-phase measurement.
MAX (1ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current exceeds
the setting.
MAX-Inrush: Blocking of inrush currents when a phase current
exceeds the setting.
12-129
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.4.1. Application
Overcurrent function with time delay inversely proportional to the
current and definite minimum tripping time.
12.4.2. Features
Operating characteristics according to British Standard 142:
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c=2 : extremely inverse
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement
Detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase
mode
Wider setting range than specified in BS 142
12.4.3.4. Measurements
Current amplitude
12-130
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a par-
ticular function is active.
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating
characteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the
RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic
(time grading).
IStart Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes
effective.
t-min Definite minimum tripping time.
NrOfPhases Defines the number of phases measured.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.
All current I/P's may be selected.
IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated cur-
rent IN.
BlockInp Defines the input for an external blocking signal.
F: - not used
T: - function always blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Pick-up signal.
12-131
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-132
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example:
Load current of protected unit IB1 = 800 A
CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A
IN2 = 5A
Relay rated current IN = 5A
Relay reference current IB-Setting:
IN2 5A
IB = IB1 = 800 A =4A
IN1 1000 A
Setting
IB 4 A
= = 0. 8
IN 5 A
12-133
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
k1
t=
c
I
1
IB
IStart
IB
t t
min
Multiplier k1-Setting
The multiplier k1-Setting enables the IDMT characteristic to be
shifted. This is used for grading a series of IDMT relays along a
line to achieve discrimination.
For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the
constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is
given by the equation
k1
t=
I
1
IB
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is
required, the factor k1 for each of the relays is given by
k1 = 5 t
For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the
following settings for k1:
12-134
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2,5 12.5
Typical settings
IB-Setting corresponding to load current of the protected
unit
IStart 1.1 IB
c-Setting according to desired characteristic for the
protected unit
k1-Setting according to the time grading calculation
tmin 0.00
12-135
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.5.1. Application
Directional overcurrent function for
detecting phase faults on ring lines
detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at
one end
backup protection for a distance protection scheme
12.5.2. Features
Directional phase fault protection
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Voltage memory feature for close faults
12.5.3.4. Measurements
Current amplitude
of the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
Active power
A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction
(IL1 * UL2L3, IS * UL3L1, IL3 * UL1L2)
Voltage amplitude
Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages
(UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)
12-136
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-137
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
T: not used
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Block F: not blocked
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Pick-up signal.
Start L1 L1 phase pick-up signal
Start L2 L2 phase pick-up signal
Start L3 L3 phase pick-up signal
MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction.
Settings:
Pick-up current I-Setting
Characteristic angle Angle
Delay Delay
Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait
Response at the end of the
memorized power direction time MemDirMode
Time during which the memorized
direction is valid MemDuration
12-138
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
I- S e t t in g
IN
D e la y
0 t
Where the rated CT current IN1 differs from the rated current IGN
of the protected unit, compensating the measurement to achieve
a match is recommended. This is done by correcting either the
reference value of the A/D input or the setting.
For example, assuming IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting
to pick up at 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would be
IGN 800 A
1 .5 = 1 .5 = 1. 2
IN1 1000 A
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an
additional criterion for preserving discrimination compared with
non-directional overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity
is 180 in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in
the following diagram.
12-139
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
UL1
IL1 L
IL1
Max. sensitivity
=45
Restraint: UL2L3
cos ( - ) < 0
UL3 UL2L3 UL Operation:
cos ( - ) > 0
12-140
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Delay
The delay enables the protection to be graded with other time-
overcurrent relays to achieve discrimination. Its setting is thus
chosen in relation to the timer settings of upstream and
downstream protective devices. The zone of protection covered
by the overcurrent protection extends to the next overcurrent
protection device.
Should in the event of a fault in the next downstream zone, the
protection for that zone fail, this protection function takes over
after the time set for Delay and clears the fault in a backup role.
12-141
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-142
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.6.1. Application
Directional inverse time overcurrent function for
detecting phase faults on ring lines
detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at
one end
backup protection for a distance protection scheme
12.6.2. Features
Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection
Operating characteristics according to British Standard
BS 142:
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c=2 : extremely inverse.
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Voltage memory feature for close faults
12.6.3.4. Measurements
Current amplitude
of the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
12-143
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Active power
A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction
(IL1 UL2L3, IL2 UL3L1, IL3 UL1L2)
Voltage amplitude
Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages
(UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)
12-144
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-145
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-146
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Setting
IB 4A
= = 0 .8
IN 5A
k1
t=
c
I
1
IB
IStart
IB
t t
min
12-147
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Multiplier k1-Setting
The multiplier k1-Setting enables the IDMT characteristic to be
shifted. This is used for grading a series of IDMT relays along a
line to achieve discrimination.
For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the
constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is
given by the equation
k1
t=
I
1
IB
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5
12-148
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an
additional criterion for preserving discrimination compared with
non-directional overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity
is 180 in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in
the following diagram.
UL1
IL1 L
IL1
Max. sensitivity
=45
Restraint: UL2L3
cos ( - ) < 0
UL3 UL2L3 UL2 Operation:
cos ( - ) > 0
12-149
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-150
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-151
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.7.1. Application
Overcurrent function with IDMT characteristic. A typical applica-
tion is as back-up for the ground fault protection function, in
which case it measures 3 I0 either supplied from an external
source or internally derived.
12.7.2. Features
Tripping characteristic according to British Standard 142:
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c=2 : extremely inverse
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
External 3 I0 signal or 3 I0 internally derived from the three
phase currents
Wider setting range than specified in BS 142
12.7.3.4. Measurements
Neutral current
12-152
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-153
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
k1
t=
c
I
1
IB
IStart
IB
tmin t
12-154
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5
12-155
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Typical settings
IB to be calculated
IStart 1.1 IB
c depends on the protected unit
k1 to be calculated
tmin 0.00
12-156
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.8.1. Application
Standard voltage applications (overvoltage and undervoltage
function)
12.8.2. Features
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Single or three-phase voltage measurement
Maximum value, respectively minimum value detection in the
three-phase mode
12.8.3.4. Measurements
Voltage amplitude
12-157
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-158
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Settings
Setting V-setting
Delay Delay
Over- or undervoltage MaxMin
Number of phases NrOfPhases
Two of these functions are frequently applied in a two-stage
scheme. The first stage detects lower prolonged overvoltages
while the second guards against higher overvoltages, which
have to be cleared quickly.
MaxMin
This parameter provides a choice of the following settings:
MIN (3ph) : Protection picks up when all three phase
voltages have fallen below setting.
MIN (1ph) : Protection picks up when the lowest of the phase
voltages falls below setting.
MAX (3ph) : Protection picks up when all three phase
voltages have exceeded setting.
MAX (1ph) : Protection picks up when the highest of the
phase voltages exceeds setting.
12-159
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
V-Setting
Stage 2
V-Setting
Stage 1
UN
Delay Delay
t
Typical settings
1st stage
V-setting 1.15 UN
Delay 2s
MaxMin MAX (1ph)
2nd stage
V-setting 1.4 UN
Delay 0.1 s
MaxMin MAX (1ph)
12-160
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.9.1. Application
High-resistance ground faults, which cannot be detected by the
distance protection, can still cause appreciable problems in spite
of the relatively low fault currents involved.
The sensitive ground fault protection function has been included
to complement the main line protection function and cover the
low ground fault current range. The protection processes the
zero-sequence components 3I0 and 3U0.
12.9.2. Features
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Directional measurement of zero-sequence components
(derived either internally or externally)
Current pick-up enabling level
Reference voltage enabling level
Adjustable characteristic angle
Permissive and blocking transfer tripping schemes
Echo logic for weak infeed and open circuit-breaker
Transient blocking logic for reversal of energy direction
12-161
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.9.3.4. Measurements
Neutral voltage (3U0)
Neutral current (3I0)
Real power component of neutral power (3U0 x 3I0, not
rotated)
Apparent power component of neutral power (3U0 x 3I0, not
rotated)
Fault direction (1 = forwards, -1 = backwards; this variable
only applies when the binary input CB closed is active)
12-162
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-163
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
tTransBlk Blocking time after a reversal of fault energy direction
(transient blocking).
Ext Block I/P for an external blocking signal.
F: enabled
T: disabled
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Receive PLC receive input.
F: - no PLC receive signal
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
CB closed CB position indicator input.
F: - function disabled
T: - function enabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
VT Superv supervision input.
F: - tripping enabled
T: - tripping disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Start L1 Inputs for the distance function signals Start L1, Start
L2, Start L3, Trip CB 3P and Trip CB for coordinating
Ext Start L2
operation.
Ext Start L3
F: - not connected
Ext Trip 3P
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Trip
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Output for signaling that the protection has picked up, i.e.
the current has exceeded the enabling setting (I-Setting).
MeasFwd O/P for signaling a fault in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd O/P for signaling a fault in the backwards direction.
Send PLC transmit signal.
12-164
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-165
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-166
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-167
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
tBasic tBasic
Start Start
I-Setting & & I-Setting
Send Send
MeasFwd MeasFwd
Receive Receive
& &
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
where:
Start : current higher than the enabling level I-setting
tBasic : basic time
MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction
I0
Tx: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic
T: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic Rx
TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk
I-Setting
I-dir
V-Setting U0
Basic functions
Echo
12-168
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
where:
<...> : optional function
Rx : receive
MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction including Transient
blocking
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction
I-dir : current enable for directional measurement
(= 0.7 I-Setting)
I-Setting : current enabling level
Iasymm : asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions
Tx : send
T : trip
TB : transient blocking
t TransBlk : blocking time
tBasic : basic time
tWait : waiting time
V-setting : reference voltage
12-169
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
tBasic tBasic
I-dir I-dir
& &
tWait tWait
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
A1 A2
HEST 045 003 V
where:
I-Setting
: current enabling level
I-dir : current enable for directional measurement
(= 0.7 I-Setting)
tBasic : basic time
tWait : waiting time
MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction
Iasymm
V-Setting U0
Basic functions
Non-directional transmission
12-170
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
The voltage pick-up must be set to 1.6 times the level of the
spurious voltages, which can occur due to asymmetries in the
VT secondary circuit.
Usec.asymm
U - Setting = 1.6
UN 3
where:
V-setting : setting of the enabling voltage for the directional
measurement
Usec.asymm : voltage component 3U0 caused by asymmetries
in the VT secondary circuit (e.g. VT errors)
12-171
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-172
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-173
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Ext Block
Applying a signal to the Ext. Block input disables the entire
protection function.
Receive
The signal transmitted by the protection at the remote end is
connected to this input.
CB closed
The CB closed input is intended for the position indicator signal
from the circuit-breaker and has a fixed pick-up delay of 50 ms.
The protection function is only enabled when this signal is
received to confirm that the CB is closed. The corresponding
auxiliary contacts for the three phases must be connected in
series to ensure that the protection does not operate during
single-phase reclosure.
The echo logic is enabled 100 ms after the circuit-breaker is
opened.
VT Supervision
The VT Superv input is needed to block the echo logic. It can
be excited either by the VTSup signal from the internal distance
protection function or an auxiliary contact on the m.c.b. via a
binary input.
If this input is not needed, it must be set to F.
Ext Start L1, Ext Start L2, Ext Start L3, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip
These inputs are for coordinating operation with the distance
protection function. To them are connected the distance function
signals Start R, Start S, Start T, Trip CB 3P and Trip CB.
They must be set to F if an independent directional ground fault
scheme is in use.
12-174
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.9.6.12.1. Outputs
Trip
There are two Trip signals, one for energizing the tripping relay
via the tripping logic and the other for controlling LEDs and
signaling contacts.
Start
An active "Start" output signals that the zero-sequence current
has exceeded the pick-up setting I-Setting. This signal is only
generated providing the function is not blocked.
MeasFwd
MeasFwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault
in the forwards direction, i.e. the settings of I dir and V-setting
have been exceeded.
MeasBwd
MeasBwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault
in the backwards direction, i.e. the settings of I dir and V-
setting have been exceeded.
Send
The Send output is the signal sent to the remote end of the line.
Receive Inhibit
The Recve Inh signal prevents the distance function from
receiving a PLC signal (see Section 12.9.6.1. Coordination with
the distance protection). It is only generated when the
parameter 1 Channel is set, the basic time has expired or the
ground fault protection picks up for a reverse fault.
The signal Recve Inh must be connected to the distance func-
tion input ExtBlkHF.
12-175
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.10.1. Application
The sensitive earth fault (E/F) protection detects E/Fs on
overhead lines and in radial systems. It is suitable for application
in ungrounded systems, systems with Petersen coils and in
resistance grounded MV and HV power systems. The protection
scheme monitors the neutral voltage and current of the protected
line. Depending on the characteristic angle chosen, it responds
to either the real or apparent value of the neutral power.
12.10.2. Features
Adjustable characteristic angle
Compensation of CT phase errors
Suppression of DC component in voltage and current signals
Suppression of harmonics in voltage and current signals
12-176
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-177
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
Block Input for the 'Blocking the function'.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs from protection function)
TRIP Tripping signal
Start Start signal
12.10.6.1. Settings:
Pick-up power setting P Setting
Characteristic angle Angle
Reset ratio Drop-Ratio
Trip Delay Delay
Phase error compensation Phi-Comp.
Rated power PN
The value entered for 'P Setting' is the power at which the
function picks up with reference to rated power ' PN'. The
parameter 'P Setting' has a setting range of 0.005 to 0.100 in
steps of 0.001.
The setting of the parameter 'Angle' determines the
characteristic angle of the measurement, which is described
below under 'Real power' and 'Apparent power'.
The desired reset ratio of the pick-up value in percent can be
adjusted with the parameter 'Drop-Ratio'. To ensure that the
reset ratio is adequate for low values of 'P Setting', the following
condition must be checked:
50
' Drop - Ratio' < 100
100 ' P Setting' + 1
12-178
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-179
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-180
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Time delay
With the parameter 'Delay', the delay required between picking
up of the relay ('Start' signal) and tripping ('Trip' signal) can be
set. The setting range provided is 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01.
CT/VT inputs
The two CT and VT input channels 'CurrentInp' (current) and
'VoltageInp' (voltage) have to be configured for the purpose. The
current input channel may only be allocated to a single-phase
measuring CT and the voltage channel to a single-phase VT.
Binary inputs and outputs
The function can be blocked with the binary input 'Block'.
12-181
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Connection diagram
L1 L2 L3
e 10
U4
11
n
1 (1A)
2 (5A)
I1
3
4 (1A)
5 (5A)
7 (1A)
8 (5A)
I3
9
3 I0 with
Holmgreen
winding
10 (1A)
11 (5A)
I4 DIREFISOL
12
or 3Io
with core
balanced CT
12-182
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.11.1. Application
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase current inputs for
monitoring the symmetry of the three-phase system
detection of a residual current
supervision of the CT input channels
12.11.2. Features
Evaluation of
the sum of the three phase currents
the sequence of the three phase currents
adjustment of residual current amplitude
blocking at high currents (higher than 2 IN)
blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low currents
(below 0.05 IN)
insensitive to DC components
insensitive to harmonics
12.11.3.4. Measurements
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase
currents
12-183
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-184
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.12.1. Application
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase voltage inputs for
detection of residual voltage
monitoring the asymmetry of the three-phase voltage system
due to the zero-sequence component
supervision of the VT input channels
12.12.2. Features
Evaluation of
the sum of the three phase voltages
the sequence of the three phase voltages
Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase voltages
with a residual voltage input
Adjustment of residual voltage amplitude
Blocking at high voltages (higher than 1.2 UN)
Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low voltages
(below 0.4 UN phase-to-phase)
Insensitive to DC components
Insensitive to harmonics
Evaluation of the phase voltages is only possible in the case of Y
connected input transformers, otherwise the residual component
cannot be detected.
12.12.3.4. Measurements
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase
voltages and the neutral voltage
12-185
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-186
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.13.1. Application
Checking the synchronization criteria (amplitudes, phase-shift
and frequency difference) of two electrical systems and, provid-
ing the corresponding limits are satisfied, enabling them to be
connected in parallel.
12.13.2. Features
Monitoring synchronism:
Single-phase voltage measurement.
Comparison of the voltages (dU), phase-shift (dPh) and fre-
quencies (df) of two voltage vectors. Calculation of the corre-
sponding differences between the voltage vectors in the
complex plane.
Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components of the
voltage signals (after filtering of harmonic and DC compo-
nents).
Monitoring voltage:
Single or three-phase voltage measurement.
Evaluation of instantaneous values (non-digitally filtered
analog signals) resulting in a large permissible frequency
range. Detection of the largest and smallest of the three
phase voltages in the case of three-phase measurement.
No filtering of harmonics or DC component.
Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on busbar and line
sides (for amplitude and phase-angle adjustment).
Additional voltage input (for use in double busbar stations)
with provision for remote switchover.
Provision for remote selecting the operating mode.
12-187
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.13.3.4. Measurements
12-188
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-189
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-190
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
supervisTime Period between the function picking up and it issuing the
CB close enable (PermitToClos).
All the conditions for synchronism must remain fulfilled
during this time, otherwise the function is reset.
t-Reset Reset time following the non-fulfillment of one or more
synchronism conditions.
uBusInp-Ph Choice of phase I/P on the busbar side.
Possible settings:
1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3 ph Y; 3
ph
The phase chosen must agree with the voltage input
channel selected (i.e. uBusInput1 and, if selected,
uBusInput2).
uBusInput1 1st voltage I/P channel on the busbar side.
This must agree with the phase chosen (uBusInp-Ph).
uBusInput2 2nd voltage input channel (if applicable) on the busbar
side.
This must agree with the chosen phase (uBusInp-Ph). If
a second input is not configured, the function only takes
account of the 1st. voltage I/P channel (uBusInput1).
uLineInp-Ph Choice of phase input on the line side.
Possible settings:
1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3 ph Y; 3
ph
The phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P
channel selected (i.e. uLineInput).
uLineInput Voltage input channel on the line side.
This must agree with the chosen phase (uLineInp-Ph).
uBus1Activ, Binary inputs for remote switching between voltage input
uBus2Activ channels connected to double busbars (mimic busbar).
These inputs are only active providing the second busbar
input channel has been configured (uBusInput2).
1)
F: - input disabled
T: - input enabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
12-191
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
ReleaseInp1 Binary inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function
(internal OR gate, i.e. at least one of the inputs has to be
ReleaseInp2
set to TRUE (T) or controlled by a binary input to enable
the output). If both inputs are FALSE (F), the
function does not run, i.e. the supervision algorithm is
NOT processed.
These inputs are used where the synchrocheck function is
only needed at certain times (e.g. in autoreclosure
schemes).
F: - synchrocheck function disabled
T: - synchrocheck function enabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
BlkSynchBus1 Binary inputs for interlocking the enabling signals at the
output of the synchrocheck function.
BlkSynchBus2
These would be typically controlled by fuse failure
BlkSynchLine
equipment (m.c.bs) monitoring the VT circuits.
F: - blocking input disabled
T: - blocking input continuously enabled
2)
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
OverridSync Binary input for bypassing the synchrocheck function.
This permits an enabling signal (PermitToClose)
regardless of whether the synchronism conditions are
fulfilled or not.
It overrides the functions blocking and other enabling
inputs.
F: - input not used
T: - SC enabling output (PermitToClose) continuously
active
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
OpModeInp1 Binary inputs for remotely selecting the operating mode:
OpModeInp2 F: - input disabled
T: - input continuously enabled
3) xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
PermitToClose Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is
enabling closure of the circuit-breaker.
It is generated at the end of the measuring period
(supervisTime) and remains active for as long as the
synchronism conditions are fulfilled, or until a blocking
signal is received, or the synchrocheck function resets.
Start Signal generated at the instant the conditions for synchro-
nism are fulfilled for the first time.
12-192
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
SyncBlockd Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is
disabled, i.e. both the inputs synchEnable1 and
synchEnable2 are set to FALSE (F), and that the
synchrocheck algorithm has been discontinued.
TrigBlockd The CB close enabling inputs are blocked (one or more
blocking I/Ps are at logical 1), but the synchrocheck
algorithm continues to run.
SyncOverrid Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is
bypassed and a CB close enabling signal is being
generated (PermitToClose) regardless of whether the
synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not.
AmplDifOK Signal indicating that the voltage difference dU between
the phases used for checking synchronism has fallen
below the value of the parameter maxVoltDif.
PhaseDifOK Signal indicating that the phase-shift dPh between the
phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below
the value of the setting of maxPhaseDif.
FreqDifOK Signal indicating that the difference of frequency df
between the phases used for checking synchronism has
fallen below the value of the setting of maxFreqDif.
LiveBus Signal indicating that the busbar is energized.
(U > minVoltage)
DeadBus Signal indicating that the busbar is de-energized.
(U < maxVoltage)
LiveLine Signal indicating that the line is energized.
(U > minVoltage)
DeadLine Signal indicating that the line is de-energized.
(U < maxVoltage)
1)
2)
Parts of the function effected by the blocking inputs:
Assuming that both busbar input channels have been configured
(double busbars), the active blocking input depends on the
statuses of the binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ:
12-193
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Assuming that only the first busbar input channel has been
configured, all the blocking inputs are active regardless of the
statuses of the binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ.
The active blocking inputs are connected internally to an OR
gate and the CB close enabling outputs are blocked, if one of
them is set to TRUE (T).
3)
12-194
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.13.6.1. General
It is only permissible to connect two energized parts of a power
system, if the difference between the amplitudes of their voltages
and the phase-shift between them are within acceptable limits.
The purpose of the synchrocheck function is to determine these
parameters and decide whether it is permissible to connect the
systems in parallel.
The function thus issues an enable signal (PermitToClose),
providing the voltages of the two systems are higher than the set
minimum voltage (minVoltage) and
the difference between the voltage amplitudes dU
the phase-shift dPh
the difference between the frequencies df
do not exceed the limits set for the parameters maxVoltDif,
maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif for the adjustable time
supervisTime.
According to the operating mode (Operat.-Mode) selected, the
function also permits de-energized parts of a power system to be
coupled.
Provision is also made for switching between voltage inputs be-
longing to the busbars of a double busbar station by appropri-
ately controlling two binary inputs (uBus1Activ and
uBus2Activ).
NOTE that the function can only check the synchronism of two
voltages at any one time, that of one of the busbars and that of
the line.
The synchrocheck function is therefore used mainly
to connect infeeds in parallel and to connect outgoing feeders
to the system
to interconnect two synchronous or asynchronous parts of a
power system
in autoreclosure schemes
as a safety check when carrying out manual switching op-
erations.
12-195
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
T1
CB
Line
VT Line
T2
Closing
command
Switching
unit
Permit to Close
uBus2Activ
uLine Input
uBus1Activ
VT SS2
uBusInput2 Synchrocheck BlckTrigLine
BlckTrigBus2
VT SS1
uBusInput1
BlckTrigBus1
where:
SS1, SS2 : busbar 1, busbar 2
VT SS1, VT SS2, VT Line : VTs on busbar 1, busbar 2 and
line
T1, T2 : isolators on busbars 1 and 2
CB : circuit-breaker
uBusInput1, uBusInput2 : voltage input channels on the
busbar side
uLineInput : voltage input channel on the
line side
12-196
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.13.6.2. Settings
Max. voltage difference dU maxVoltDif
Max. phase-shift dPh maxPhaseDif
Max. frequency difference df maxFreqDif
Minimum voltage level for monitoring minVoltage
(determination of whether plant is energized)
Maximum voltage level for monitoring maxVoltage
(determination of whether plant is de-energized)
Choice of operating mode Operat.-Mode
Measuring period (delay before issuing supervisTime
enable)
Reset delay t-Reset
Choice of phase for monitoring on the uBusInp-Ph
busbar side
Choice of phase for monitoring on the uLineInp-Ph
line side
12-197
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Synchrocheck function:
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism
Apparent
dU
L ULine B
UBus
dPhi
PhiB
PhiL
Real
where:
UBus, ULine : complex vectors for UBus and ULine
B, L : angular velocities for U bus and U line
dU = U bus U line
dPhi = PhiB PhiL
12-198
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical values
maxVoltDif: 0.2 UN
maxPhaseDif: 10
maxFreqDif: - 50 mHz for connecting largely synchronous
parts of a stable closely meshed
system or where high demands with
regard to synchronism have to be
fulfilled.
- 100 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with long
dead times (e.g. three-phase slow
reclosure) or for autoreclosure of short
transmission lines
- 200 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with short
dead times, but where high slip
frequencies are to be expected
12-199
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Typical values
minVoltage 0.70 UN
maxVoltage 0.30 UN
12-200
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Notes:
A phase-to-phase measurement is to be preferred for a
single-phase voltage measurement.
If a single-phase input has to be chosen on both sides, the
same phase should be used wherever possible.
If a three-phase Y connection is selected, phase-to-phase
voltages are formed internally. This reduces the harmonic
content and enables the function to continue to be used in
ungrounded systems, which are required to remain in service
with a single ground fault.
According to the setting for uBusInp-Ph and uLineInp-Ph,
either just one phase or all three phases are monitored.
Whether or not the conditions for synchronism (dU, dPh
12-201
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-202
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical values
For a phase-shift setting (maxPhaseDif) of 10:
maxFreqDif supervisTime
200 mHz 100... 200 ms
100 mHz 250... 450 ms
50 mHz 600...1000 ms
Typical value
t-Reset 50 ms
12-203
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Notes
The function (timer, all measuring elements and the
associated outputs) is automatically reinitialized when busbar
inputs are switched. This procedure takes about 60 ms
(internal response times). The function then begins to
evaluate the new busbar voltage and from this instant
onwards the generation of an enable signal (PermitToClose)
relating to the new system configuration is possible.
the two binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ are
inactivated in configurations in which only one busbar input
(uBusInput1) is defined.
12-204
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-205
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Application example
The scheme below shows a synchrocheck function in the same
unit as the distance protection and autoreclosure functions. The
synchrocheck function is only required during the dead times of
the autoreclosure function. This is achieved by connecting the
inverted output signal AR ready generated by the autoreclosure
function to the binary I/P ReleaseInp1 (or ReleaseInp2) of the
synchrocheck unit.
Start
Distance Auto- AR ready Synchro-
function reclosure check
Trip CB function
ReleasInp1
Trip CB 3P Close CB
SynchroChck
PermitToClose
Binary
circle
12-206
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.14.1. Application
The function can be configured for single or three-phase
autoreclosure.
The unit can operate in conjunction with either of the two
protection functions (distance and overcurrent protection) and
either an internal or external synchrocheck function.
12.14.2. Features
Up to 4 fast or slow reclosure attempts
First cycle with up to 4 individually configurable single and/or
three-phase reclosure attempts
Independent operating indicators for each reclosure cycle
Wide dead time setting range
Provision to control bypassing of the synchrocheck unit and
extending the dead time for the first zone by external signals
Clearly defined response to changing fault conditions during
the dead time (evolving faults)
12-207
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-208
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.14.3.4. Measurements
None
12-209
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-210
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-211
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
1) For the autoreclosure function to operate correctly, at least the 'Start' and
'Trip CB 3P' inputs must be connected to a protection function or via a
binary I/P to an external protection relay.
12-212
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
Start 2 Input for the AR start signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general start
signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB2 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general tripping
signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB2 Input for the general trip signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general trip signal
from the 2nd protection is connected to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Start 3 Input for the AR start signal.
The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be
connected to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB3 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.
The three-phase tripping signal from the 3rd protection
can be connected to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB3 Input for the general trip signal.
The general trip signal from the 3rd protection can be
connected to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
CB Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready
(open/close/open).
Set to on (T or True), if not needed or not fitted.
Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 ready'
In a duplex scheme, either an active CB ready or CB2
ready I/P enables an autoreclosure cycle.
Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
12-213
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
CO Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready for
a close/open cycle.
Set to on (T or True) if not needed, not fitted and
Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.
Input logic for enabling the closing command:
[(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR Dead line OR
ExtSCBypas].
CB Open Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is open.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
To avoid the operation of fast circuit-breakers from being
blocked unintentionally, the effect of this input is delayed
internally by 100 ms.
Dead line Input indicating that the line is de-energized (CB open
input if the VTs are on the busbar side).
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
An active input overrides the following logical
relationship of the inputs: synchrocheck AND CO
Ready'.
Ext. Blk AR Input for blocking the internal autoreclosure function.
Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is
immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input.
The output signals Trip 3 Pol and Def Trip are
generated and a three-phase definitive trip takes place.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Cond. Blk. AR Input for a conditional blocking signal.
Blocking only when AR cycle is not in progress.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
When tripping is by the distance protection SOTF logic
or a directional ground fault PLC signal, the
corresponding signals can be connected to this input to
prevent autoreclosure.
Manual Close Blocking input excited by the manual CB close signal.
Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is
immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Inhibit Inp. Input for blocking the follower reclosure function in a
redundant scheme. The follower is blocked from the end
of the master closing signal until the end of the reclaim
time.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
12-214
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
Extend t1 Input for conditionally extending the dead time (single
and three-phase) for the first (fast) reclosure.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
MD1_EXT_1P_1P Inputs for externally selecting the mode for the first
reclosure. They are only effective when the parameter
MD1_EXT_1P_3P
1. AR Mode is set to Ext. select.
MD1_EXT_1P3P_
Unused inputs must be set to off (F or False). If a
3P
signal is applied to more than one input, the next mode
MD1_EXT_1P3P_ in the list is the one that is active. The autoreclosure
1P3P function is blocked if none of the inputs is used.
Close CB CB close signal
Trip 3-Pol Signal to the distance function so that it can only carry
out a three-phase trip.
This signal is inverted and connected to the distance
protection I/P 1P AR.
This signal is active in many situations, but particularly
when the AR function is blocked, the CB is not ready for
AR, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time
t 1P Discrim finishes or the output signal First AR 3P is
active.
It resets at the end of reclaim time.
Def. Trip Signal initiating definitive tripping of the CB.
This signal is normally active when the protection trips
again after the last programmed reclosing shot or trips
while the AR function is blocked. The signal resets after
a fixed time of 500 ms.
AR Ready Signal AR function ready for a reclosure cycle. This
signal is active when the AR function is ON and standing
by and also during the closing command.
AR in Prog. Signal indicating that a reclosure cycle is in progress.
This signal is active from the beginning of the dead time
until the end of the last reclosure attempt.
AR Blocked Signal indicating that the autoreclosure relay is blocked.
12-215
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
SCBypas 1P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready
signals for the first single-phase reclosure:
on' First single-phase reclosure not enabled by
synchrocheck and close/open ready signals
(bypass always active).
off' First single-phase reclosure enabled by the
synchrocheck and close/open ready signals
(bypass inactive).
SCBypas1P3P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready
signals for the first single or three-phase reclosure:
on' First reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck
and close/open ready signals
(bypass always active).
off' First reclosure enabled by synchrocheck and
close/open ready signals
(bypass inactive).
Ext.SCBypas Bypasses the synchroChck and CO Ready signals.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Input logic for enabling the close command:
[(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR Dead line OR
Ext.SCBypas].
Input logic for enabling the close command:
[(synchroChk2 AND CO Ready 2) OR Dead line OR
Ext.SCBypas].
SynchroChck Input for a signal from a synchrocheck relay.
Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and
Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.
Input logic: [(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR
Dead line OR Ext.SCBypas'].
ZE Prefault Distance relay reach setting before the first fault:
on overreaching (ZExtension signal active)
off' underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 1. AR Distance relay reach after the 1st reclosure attempt:
on overreaching (ZExtension signal active)
off' underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 2. AR Distance relay reach after the 2nd reclosure attempt:
on overreaching (ZExtension signal active)
off' underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
12-216
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
ZE 3. AR Distance relay reach after the 3rd reclosure attempt:
on overreaching (ZExtension signal active)
off' underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 4. AR Distance relay reach after the 4th reclosure attempt:
on overreaching (ZExtension signal active)
off' underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZExtension Signal to the distance function to switch it to overreach
or enable an overcurrent function with a short delay.
Master Mode (For 1 breaker and redundant schemes.)
Selection of an autoreclosure function to be Master:
on Master output signals transmitted
off Master outputs blocked
MasterDelay Input for a signal delaying the closing command from the
follower reclosure function.
This signal picks up when the dead time of the master
reclosure function starts and is reset either by a new trip
after the last reclosure of the cycle or at the end of the
wait time following successful reclosure by the master.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Mast.noSucc Input for a blocking signal from the master CB.
This signal is triggered by the rising edge of the
Def.Trip output from the master reclosure function and
resets after a fixed time of 500 ms.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
DelayFlwr. Signal to delay the follower CB for as long as the master
circuit-breaker has not completed its autoreclosure
cycle.
The signal picks up at the start of master AR dead time
and is reset either by the rising edge of the Def.Trip
output or the falling edge of the Close CB output after
the time tClose.
Blk.toFlwr Signal to block the follower CB as long as reclosure of
the master CB is unsuccessful.
The excursion of this signal is the same as for the
Def.Trip output.
12-217
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
CB2 Ready Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready
(open/close/open).
Set to off (F or False), if not needed or not fitted.
Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 ready
In a duplex scheme, the autoreclosure cycle is enabled
either by an active CB ready or CB2 ready input.
Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
CO Ready 2 Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready for a
close/open operation.
Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and
Dead line 2 is not used.
Input logic for enabling the close command:
[(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) OR Dead line 2
OR ExtSCBypas].
CB2 open I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is open.
Set to on (T or True), if not needed. Observe the
information given for the duplex logic in a duplex
scheme.
SynchroChck2 Input for a signal from a synchrocheck function
belonging to CB2.
Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and
Dead line 2 or ExtSCBypas not used.
Input logic for enabling the close command:
[(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) OR Dead line 2
OR ExtSCBypas].
Dead line 2 Input indicating that line 2 is de-energized (CB2 open
and VTs 2 on the busbar side).
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
An active input overrides the following logical
relationship of the inputs: synchrocheck 2 AND CO
Ready 2.
Close CB2 Heavy duty relay output for the CB2 close command
Close CB2 Auxiliary relay output for the CB2 close signal
CB2 Priority Input for determining the preferred circuit-breaker:
off (F or False) CB1 is preferred circuit-breaker
on (T or True) CB2 is preferred circuit-breaker
If both circuit-breakers are closed before a fault, only the
preferred circuit-breaker performs the entire
autoreclosure cycle. The other circuit-breaker closes
either after successful autoreclosure or when the close
command to the preferred circuit-breaker is not enabled
(missing CO Ready or Synchrocheck).
12-218
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.14.6.1. General
The autoreclosure function can perform from 1 to 4
autoreclosure attempts. The first attempt can be either single or
three-phase while the subsequent attempts are always three-
phase. The type and number are determined by the parameters
1. AR Mode (4 different modes for the 1st reclosure cycle) and
2..4 AR Mode.
The function can operate in conjunction with either an external
distance protection relay or other internal protection functions.
It can also operate in a scheme comprising two or more protec-
tion functions.
12-219
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
REB500sys
UZ Start L1L2L3 Start AR
Trip CB Trip CB
Trip CB 3P Trip CB 3P
CB Manual Close
1PolAR Trip 3P
CO ready
Close CB
CB open
ZExtension ZExtension
REB500sys
UZ Start L1L2L3 Start AR
Trip CB Trip CB
Trip CB 3P Trip CB 3P
CB Manual Close
1pol AR Trip 3P
CO ready
CB open
CB close
ZExtension ZExtension
12-220
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
O/C (Logic)
REB500sys
Trip >= 1
Start AR
I1>, t1
Trip CB 3P
O/C
Trip
CB Manual
I2>, t2
CO ready
Close CB
CB open
Block ZExtension
Cl
where:
t1 standard delay (0.5 ... 1.5 s)
t2 short delay (0.02 ... 0.2 s)
I1>, I2> pick-up value I set for Trip'
12-221
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-222
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
REB500sys
UZ(2) Start RST Start AR(2)
Trip CB Trip CB
Trip CB 3P Trip CB 3P
Trip 3-Pol
1PolAR >1
=
CB Manual Close
ZExtension ZExtension
Ext. Blk. AR
CO Ready
Close CB
CB open
CB Manual Close
CO Ready
Close CB
CB open
AR Ready
UZ(1)
>1
= Start
Start RST
Trip CB
>1
= Trip CB
>
=1 Trip CB 3P
Trip CB 3P
12-223
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.14.6.5. Timers
The timers have setting ranges extending up to 300 s in steps of
10 ms.
The purpose of each of the timers is described below.
12-224
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example:
Time T Oper < Delay(2) of the distance function means that
autoreclosure only takes place for faults in the first distance zone
(Delay(1)).
This function is not required for schemes that only use current
functions. The binary inputs Start and Trip CB 3P are
connected together (see Section 12.14.6.3.).
12-225
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
't Timeout
The parameter t Timeout determines the period after the dead
time within which the close signal must be issued, otherwise a
Def.Trip is generated and no further reclosure attempt is made.
Before a close command is issued at the end of every dead time,
the logic [(synchroChck AND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR
ExtSCBypas)] is checked and the command only enabled
providing all the criteria are correct within the setting of
t Timeout.
12-226
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-227
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-228
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Manual close
The reclosure function is immediately blocked (for the blocking
time t AR Block) by a Manual close signal. This signal is also
needed for the overreaching logic to switch the ZExtension sig-
nal to on.
12-229
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-230
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-231
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-232
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
300 ms
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t Inhibit.
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,
'2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', ZE Prefault = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-233
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
First AR 3P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
300 ms
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t Inhibit.
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P, '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off',
ZE Prefault = on, ZE 1. AR = off.
12-234
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Successful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 3P
Second AR
300 ms
Third AR
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 3P
Second AR
Third AR
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P,
2..4. AR Mode = 3AR, ZE Prefault = on,
ZE 1. AR = off, ZE 2. AR = on and ZE 3. AR = off.
12-235
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t close
Close CB
ZExtension
300 ms
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t inhibit.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,
2..4. AR Mode = off, Zextension = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-236
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
300 ms
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t inhibit.
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,
2..4. AR Mode = off, Zextension = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-237
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,
2..4. AR Mode = off, Zextension = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-238
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,
2..4. AR Mode = off, Zextension = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-239
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-240
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
A B
tS
tW
tP
0 1
C
6
2
A 5
3
O 4
t1 t2
t3 t4 t5
t6
t7
0 1
C
2
6
B 5
3
4
O
(t)
A: circuit-breaker 1 B: circuit-breaker 2
C: "closed" position O: "open" position
0: start 1: trip signal
2: contacts part 3: current interrupted
4: close signal 5: current flows again
6: contacts make
t1: tripping time t2: reclosing time t3: arc extinction time
t4: dead time t5: pre-ignition time t6: duration of interruption
t7: resulting dead time
tp: dead time ts: inhibit time tw: fault duration
12-241
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.15.1. Application
Logical combination of binary input signals or of output signals
from the protection functions, e.g. for
specific signals required by the application
supplementary protection functions.
12.15.2. Features
Binary input channels assignable to
binary input signals
protection function output signals
All input channels can be inverted
Following logic functions available for selection:
OR gate with 4 inputs
AND gate with 4 inputs
R/S flip-flop with 2 inputs for setting and 2 inputs for reset-
ting:
The output is 0, if at least one of the reset inputs is
1.
The output is 1, if at least one of the set inputs is 1
AND none of the reset inputs is 1.
The output status is sustained when all the inputs are
at 0.
Every logic has an additional blocking input, which when acti-
vated switches the output to 0.
12.15.3.4. Measurements
None
12-242
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-243
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-244
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.16.1. Application
General purpose timer for
integration of pulsating binary signals to obtain a continuous
signal, e.g. output of the loss-of-excitation function (out-of-
step protection) or reverse power protection
extension of short I/P signals (pulse prolongation)
simple time delay.
12.16.2. Features
Input channel and blocking input assignable to
binary input signals
protection function output signals
Input channel and blocking input can be inverted.
Adjustable reset time
2 types of time delay
Integration: Only the time during which the input signal is
at logical 1 counts at the end of the time delay.
No integration: The total time from the instant the timer
starts until it is either reset or expires counts.
12.16.3.4. Measurements
Time from the instant the timer starts
12-245
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-246
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Impulse
prolongation
0 t 0 t
tA tA
(No (No
tripping) tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Impulse
prolongation
0 t 0 t
tA tA
(No
tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
NOTE: Tripping only takes place, if a start also occurs within the time tR.
tA tripping time ("Trip-Delay")
tR reset time ("Reset-Delay")
12-247
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Setting
Setting
tint tint
Integration
0 t 0 t
(No (No
tripping) tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
tR tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Setting
Setting
tint tint
Integration
0 t 0 t
Tripping
0 t 0 t
12-248
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.17.1. Application
General current monitoring with instantaneous response
(over- and undercurrent)
Current monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is
required (over- and undercurrent).
12.17.2. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and
largely independent of frequency
Stores the peak value following pick-up
No suppression of DC component
No suppression of harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement
Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode
Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
12.17.3.1. CT inputs:
Current
12.17.3.4. Measurements:
Current amplitude (only available if function trips)
12-249
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-250
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Settings:
Current pick-up I-Setting
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency f-min
Over- or undercurrent MaxMin
12-251
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
i 15
IN 14.14
10
Setting current
10 I N
0 t
Output signal
0 t
Typical settings:
Peak value phase fault protection
I-Setting according to application
Delay 0.01 s
f-min 40 Hz
12-252
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.18.1. Application
Instantaneous voltage monitoring (over- and undervoltage)
Voltage monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is
required (over- and undervoltage).
12.18.2. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and
largely independent of frequency
Stores the peak value following pick-up
No suppression of DC component
No suppression of harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement
Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode
Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
12.18.3.1. VT inputs
Voltage
12.18.3.4. Measurements
Voltage amplitude (only available if function trips)
12-253
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-254
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Settings:
Voltage pick-up V-setting
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency f-min
Over- or undervoltage Max / Min
The instantaneous overvoltage function is a high-speed
protection which operates in a wide frequency range. It is
intended for the following applications:
Overvoltage protection which is largely uninfluenced by
frequency fluctuations especially in the range f > fN.
At frequencies f < fN the limited capability of the input VTs
must be taken into consideration.
High-speed overvoltage protection because the
instantaneous voltage is detected. Since neither DC nor
harmonic components are suppressed, there is no delay due
to digital filtering.
Compared with the standard voltage protection function, the
instantaneous function has a slightly higher pick-up value
tolerance and it should therefore only be used for the
applications recommended above.
Since the measuring principle is the same as for the overcurrent
protection with peak value detection, please refer to that Section
for its description and the minimum frequency f-min data.
Typical settings:
V-setting according to application
Delay according to application
f-min 40 Hz
12-255
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.19.1. Application
Overtemperature protection with accurate thermal image of
the protected unit.
12.19.2. Features
1st order thermal model
Alarm and tripping stages
Adjustable initial temperature
DC component filter
Harmonic filter
Single or three-phase current measurement
Maximum value detection for three-phase measurement
Temperature rise calculated 40 times for each thermal time
constant setting
12.19.3.4. Measurements
Temperature rise
Power dissipation
Current
12-256
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-257
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Settings:
Initial temperature rise Theta-Begin
Temperature rise for alarm Theta-Warn
Temperature rise for tripping Theta-Trip
No. of phase currents measured NrOfPhases
Reference current IB-Setting
Thermal time constant TimeConstant
The overtemperature function guards against inadmissible
temperature rise caused by overcurrents. The temperature rise
is modeled on the basis of the influence of the current flowing
through the protected unit on a thermal image of the protected
unit. In contrast to the overload protection, this function can
protect units of any power rating and thermal capacity. It
monitors the temperature rise and not the absolute temperature.
It takes account therefore neither of the ambient temperature nor
the effectiveness of a cooling system.
The protection operates with a thermal image of the temperature
rise. A current change causes the temperature of the protected
unit to rise from an initial value to a final value according to one
or several exponential functions. The various influences on the
temperature rise are the thermal response of, for example in the
case of a power transformer, the cooling water, the oil, the
windings etc. One exponential function such as that of the
transformer oil is always more dominant than the others. The
thermal image used in the protection for modeling the transient
temperature rise operates according to an exponential function.
The excursion of the temperature rise modeled by the protection
is determined by the following:
the final steady-state temperature corresponding to the
current
the increased temperature rise due to the transfer functions
The protection assumes that at the rated current IGN of the
protected unit, the temperature rise represents 100 %.
Neglecting any compensation of the A/D channel or the base
current IB, the protection measures a current IR determined by
the rated current of the CTs:
IN2
IR = IGN
IN1
12-258
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
where
IGN : rated current of the protected unit
IN1, IN2 : rated primary and secondary CT currents.
The current referred to the rated current IN of the protection is:
IR IGN IN2
IR = =
IN IN IN1
where
0 : initial temperature rise
: pick-up temperature rise
: thermal time constant
The variables in the submenu 'DISPLAY OPERATING VALUES'
are the calculated temperature rise, the power dissipation and
the current. The first two are mean values over the period of
calculation (= / 40).
The values shown in the event list is the power dissipation at the
instant of tripping.
Example:
Rated current of the protected unit IGN = 8000 A
CT ratings IN1 = 10000 A
IN2 = 5 A
Rated relay current IN = 5 A
12-259
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-260
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
1,5
nw = 100C nw = 60C
1,0
0 t
w ( t = )
[C] 160
l ( t = ) w
140
Oil
120
nw
100
Oil Oil
80
60
40
w Oil
20
w Oil
12-261
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
=126.4C
140
Winding temperature
Thermal image temperature
120
130
[C] [%]
120
110
Overload i = 1.2
Temperature rise at rated nw n oil = 10C w = 10 min
110 current
n oil = 50C oil = 120 min
Thermal time constant setting = 90 min
100 100
0 100 200 300 400 500
t [min]
HEST 905 036 C
Typical settings:
IB-Setting to be calculated
Theta-Begin 100 %
Theta-Warn 105 %
Theta-Trip 110 %
12-262
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.20.1. Application
Differential protection of two and three-winding power
transformers generator/transformer units.
12.20.2. Features
Non-linear, current-dependent operating characteristic
(see Fig. 12.92)
High stability during through-faults and in the presence of CT
saturation
Short tripping times
Three-phase measurement
Inrush current restraint
using the second harmonic
detection of the highest phase current
detection of the load current to determine whether the
transformer is energized or not
Compensation of phase group
Compensation of CT ratio
Scheme for three-winding transformers
phase-by-phase comparison of the highest winding
current with the sum of the currents of the other two
windings
DC current component filter
harmonic filter
12-263
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.20.3.4. Measurements
L1 phase summation current
L2 phase summation current
L3 phase summation current
L1 phase restraining current
L2 phase restraining current
L3 phase restraining current
12-264
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-265
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
s3 Vector group for winding 3.
Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with
Designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag)
Phase-angle adjustment of the winding 3 voltage in relation
to the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30.
CurrentInp3 Defines the CT input channel for winding 3.
The protection operates in a two-winding mode, if no third
input is selected.
BlockInp Binary address used as blocking input.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
InrushInp Activates the inrush restraint.
This enables, for example, the inrush current resulting from
energizing a parallel transformer to be detected and
compensated.
F: - not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
HighSetInp Determines whether the normal or high-set Basic setting g
is used.
F: - not used
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Output for the signaling tripping
Trip-L1 Output for signaling tripping by L1 phase.
Trip-L2 Output for signaling tripping by L2 phase.
Trip-L3 Output for signaling tripping by L3 phase.
Inrush Output for signaling inrush current.
Stabilizing Output for signaling IH > b during through-faults.
12-266
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
I
IN
3
Operation for
I'1
<b
Operation IN
2 or
I'2
<b
IN
1
v Restraint
g
1 b 2 3 IH
IN
Protected I2
I1 unit
I3 HEST 965 007 C
I = I1 + I2 + I3 Operating
(differential) current
whereI'1 = greatest of I1 ,I 2 ,I 3
I' 2 = I1 + I 2 + I 3 I'1
= (I'1; I' 2 )
12-267
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Basic setting g
The basic setting 'g' defines the pick-up setting of the differential
protection for internal faults.
The lowest possible value should be chosen for 'g' (high
sensitivity) to enable it to detect transformer earth faults and
internal faults in addition to phase faults.
The setting of 'g' must not be too low, however, to avoid the
danger of false tripping due to:
CT errors
the maximum off-load transformer current at the maximum
short-time system voltage
tap-changer range
The off-load current (magnetizing current) of a modern power
transformer is very low, usually between 0.3 and 0.5 % of rated
current at rated voltage. During short-time voltage peaks, e.g.
following load shedding, the off-load current can reach as much
as 10 % or more.
The tap-changer voltage range is usually between 5 % and
10 %, but ranges of 20 % and more occur. Its influence has to
be taken into account regardless of whether the tap-changer is
manually operated or controlled by a voltage regulator.
12-268
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up ratio 'v' is decisive for the stability of the protection
during external phase and earth faults, i.e. in the presence of
high through-fault currents.
The value of 'v' defines the ratio of the operating current to
restraint current. The setting should be such that when operating
under load conditions, weak faults causing only a low differential
current can still be detected, but at the same time there is no risk
of false tripping during through-faults. A typical setting is v = 0.5.
Restraint current b
The restraint current b defines the point at which the
characteristic is switched.
The sloped section of the characteristic ensures that the relay
remains stable during through-faults with CT saturation.
The ability to switch between two different slopes enables the
characteristic to adapt to different conditions.
The recommended setting for 'b' is 1.5. This provides high
stability during high through-fault currents and sufficient
sensitivity to detect fault currents in the region of the operating
current.
Factors a2 and a3
The full setting range for the factors a2 and a3 for compensating
current amplitude only applies, if the reference value for the CT
input channels is set to 1.000. At all other settings, the
permissible upper limit reduces in proportion to the ratio of the
CT input channel reference values (transformer winding
1/winding 2, respectively winding 3/winding 1).
12-269
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Operating characteristic
The restraint current in the case of a three-winding power
transformer is derived from the currents of two windings and not
three. In the interest of the best possible through-fault stability,
the two largest currents of the three windings are used for this
purpose.
The restrain current is either defined by the equation
IH = I1 I2 cos for -90 < < 90
or is zero
IH = 0 for 90 < < 270
The angle
= (I1, I2 )
I2
I2 I1 I2
= 180
HEST 905003c C
12-270
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 0,5 1 1,5 IN
HEST 905 003d C
12-271
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 1 2 IN
HEST 905 003e C
Example:
Internal fault and rated current flowing through the transformer:
I1 I
= 4 2 =1 = 0
IN IN
-I 2
I1
I = I1 + I2 = 4 IN IN = 3 IN
IH = I1 I2 cos = 4 IN 1IN 1 = 2 IN
12-272
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-273
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
250/5 A
1
110 kV 131 A
25 MVA
20 kV 722 A
2
1000/5 A
HEST 905 004a C
ICT1 250
IB1 = ITN1 = 131 A a1 = = = 1.91
ITN1 131
ICT 2 1000
IB2 = ITN2 = 722 A a1 = = = 1.38
ITN2 722
12-274
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
A further difference lies in the fact that the 'a' factors only effect
the differential protection, whilst changing the reference values
of the A/D channels effects the currents for the entire protection
system (all functions and measured variables).
The windings of a three-winding transformer normally have
different power ratings and a reference power has to be chosen,
which is used for all three windings. All the settings of the
protection are then referred to the reference currents calculated
from the reference power.
250/5 A
25 MVA 110 kV 131 A
1 500/5 A
3
2
SB 25 ICT 2 600
IB 2 = = 722 A a2 = = = 0.83
3 UTN2 3 20 IB 2 722
SB 25 ICT 3 500
IB3 = = 2291 A a3 = = = 0.22
3 UTN3 3 6.3 IB3 2291
12-275
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
The same results are obtained by applying the formulas with the
reference power SB:
UTN1 ICT1 3 110 250 3
a1 = = = 1.905
SB 25000
ITN2 577
Winding 2: Reference value = = = 0.962
ICT 2 600
ITN3 458
Winding 3: Reference value = = = 0.916
ICT 3 500
ITN2 577
a2 = = = 0.799
IB 2 722
12-276
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
ITN3 458
a3 = = = 0.200
IB3 2291
i F2
i F
G S GN
i F
Saux.sys.
Example: iF2 = 10; = 0.03
SGN
iF = 10 0.03 = 0.3
12-277
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
It follows from this that 'g' must be set higher than 0.3 to avoid
the possibility of a false trip.
Alternative No. 2: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder
on the generator side of the unit transformer (Fig. 12.94). These
CTs usually have the same ratio as the generator CTs although
the rating of the unit transformer is much less. The reason is the
high fault level on the generator side of the unit transformer and
the consequentially high thermal and dynamic stress on the CTs.
The reference value of the CT channel of the protection is
determined by the rated current of the generator and not of the
unit transformer.
Alternative No. 3: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder
on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer (Fig. 12.94). In this
case, the CTs are specified according to the rated current of the
unit transformer.
Advantages:
clearly defined zone of protection
reduced performance required of the CTs, which are
therefore cheaper
Disadvantages:
Interposing CTs may be necessary
reduced sensitivity of the protection for faults in the protected
zone, but on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer
12-278
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
800/5 A
3000/5 A
300 MVA
GT 220/18 kV
30 MVA
0.8/10 kA 10/1 A
UT 18/6 kV
1/3 kA
10000/5 A
I>
300 MVA
G 18 kV
10 kA
10000/5 A
12-279
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
d11 d11
2 3
12-280
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
I
L1
1L1
I Star-connected primary
I 2L1
L1
L2
1L2
I 2L2 Delta-connected secondary
I 1L3 L2
L3 I 2L3 Phase-angle between the currents of
L3
the same phase on both sides
I
1L1
5 x 30 = 150
150
IF
1L1 (compensat ed) = 1/ 3 ( I1L1 + I1L2 )
I I1FL2 (compensat ed) = I2L1
2L1 HEST 905 005 C
Yy0 Yy6
1 2 I1L1 I2L1 1 2 I
1L1
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I
2L1
Yd1 Yd5
1 2 I1L1 I 1 2 I 1L1
2L1
L1 L1 L1
L1
L2 L2 L2
L2
L3 L3 L3
L3
I
2L1
Yd7 Yd11
1 2 I 1L1 1 2 I1L1
I
L1 2L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
12-281
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Yz1 Yz5
1 2 I1L1 I 2L1 1 2 I1L1
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
Yz7 Yz11
1 2 I 1L1 1 2
L1 I
L1 I2L1 1L1
L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
1L1
Dy1 Dy5
I1L1 I 2L1 1 2
1 2
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
Dy7 Dy11
1 2 I 1 2
1L1
L1 I2L1 I1L1
L1 L1
L2 L1
L2 L2
L3 L2
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
Dd0 Dd6
1 2 I I 1 2 I1L1
1L1 2L1
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I2L1
12-282
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Dz0 Dz2
1 2 I 1L1 I 2L1 1 2 I
1L1
L1 L1 L1 I2L1
L1
L2 L2 L2
L2
L3 L3 L3
L3
Dz4 Dz6
1 2 I 1 2 I1L1
L1 1L1
L1 L1
S L1
S L2
L3 L2
L3 L3
L3
I
2L1
I2L1
Dz8 Dz10
1 2 I1L1 1 2 I
1L1
L1 L1 L1 I2L1
L1
L2 L2 L2
L2
L3 L3 L3
L3
I 2L1
12-283
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
X X X
s3 y0 y6 d1 d5 d7 d11 z1 z5 z7 z11
s2
y0 EEE EEF EEA CCB EEB CCA EEG CCH EEH CCG
y6 EFE EFF EFA CDB EFB CDA EFG CDH EFH CDG
d1 EAE EAF EAA COB EAB COA EAG COH EAH COG
d5 CBC CBD CBO CBB CBN CBA CBK CBH CBJ CBG
d7 EBE EBF EBA CNB EBB CNA EBG CNH EBH CNG
d11 CAC CAD CAO CAB CAN CAA CAK CAH CAJ CAG
z1 EGE EGF EGA CKB EGB CKA EGG CKH EGH CKG
z5 CHC HD CHO CHB CHN CHA CHK CHH CHJ CHG
z7 EHE EHF EHA CJB EHB CJA EHG CJH EHH CJG
z11 CGC CGD CGO CGB CGN CGA CGK CGH CGJ CGG
12-284
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Example:
The compensation for the currents of a three-winding
transformer Yd5y0 is as follows:
s1 = Y
s2 = d5 CBC results from Table 12.2, i.e. the
s3 = y0
12-285
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
IFL1 / 1 1 1 0 IL1/ 1
1
IFL 2 / 1 = 0 1 1 IL 2 / 1
Winding 1: F 3 1 0 1 IL 3 / 1
IL 3 / 1
ILF1/ 2 1 0 0 IL1 / 2
Winding 2: IFL 2 / 2 = 1 0 1 0 IL 2 / 2
F 0 0 1 I
IL 3 / 2 L 3 / 2
ILF1 / 3 1 1 0 IL1 / 3
1
IFL 2 / 3 = 0 1 1 IL 2 / 3
Winding 3: F 1 0 1 IL 3 / 3
3
IL 3 / 3
Typical values:
g 0.3 IN
v 0.5
b 1.5
g-High 0.75 IN
I-Inst. 12 IN
InrushRatio 10 %
InrushTime 5s
a1, a2, a3 to be calculated
s1, s2, s3 project related
12-286
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.21.1. Application
Under- and overfrequency
Load-shedding
12.21.2. Features
Measurement of one voltage
Frequency calculation based on the complex voltage vector
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Undervoltage blocking
12.21.3.4. Measurements
Frequency
Voltage
12-287
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Settings:
Frequency Frequency
Delay Delay
Undervoltage blocking Block Voltage
Under or over frequency Max / Min
Frequency protection is used either to protect synchronous
machines and prime-movers against the effects of operating at
under or overfrequency or for load-shedding in the event of an
overload.
12-288
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Typical settings:
1. Protection of machines
2. Load-shedding
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage
12-289
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.22.1. Application
Static, dynamic and adaptive load shedding in power utility and
industrial distribution systems.
12.22.2. Features
One phase voltage as input variable
Supervises the rate-of-change df/dt of the frequency
Provision for enabling by absolute frequency
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics and other high-frequency signals
Undervoltage blocking
12.22.3. Inputs and outputs
12.22.3.4. Measurements
Rate-of-change of frequency
Absolute frequency
Voltage amplitude
12-290
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
ParSet 1..4 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a
particular function is active.
df/dt Rate-of-change of frequency pick-up setting.
Inadmissible settings:
df/dt = 0
df/dt > 0 for absolute frequency settings < fN
df/dt < 0 for absolute frequency settings > fN
Frequency Setting of the absolute frequency enabling criterion.
(active Operation for overfrequency or underfrequency is
/inactive) determined by the absolute frequency setting:
Underfrequency for frequency settings < fN
Overfrequency for frequency settings > fN
12-291
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
Blocking Input for blocking the operation of the function.
Always off : - not used
Always on : - operation always blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection
functions)
Blocked (U<) signals when the function is blocked by the undervoltage
signal criterion.
TRIP Output for signaling tripping.
Settings:
Rate-of-change of frequency df/dt
Absolute frequency Frequency
Undervoltage Block Voltage
Delay Delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function only trips when the
rate-of-change is higher than setting, the absolute frequency
criterion picks up and the voltage is not lower than the
undervoltage setting.
The additional absolute frequency criterion prevents unwanted
operation of the rate-of-change function during power system
transients. Where it is desired that the rate-of-change function
should operate without regard to the absolute frequency, the
Frequency knob must be set to inactive.
12-292
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.23.1. Application
Protection of power transformers against excessive flux.
12.23.2. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio
Single-phase measurement
Definite time delay
Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector
Insensitive to DC components
Insensitive to harmonics
Over- or underexcitation mode
12.23.3. Inputs and outputs
CT/VT inputs
Voltage
Binary inputs
Blocking
Binary outputs
Pick-up
Tripping
Measurements
Voltage/frequency
Frequency
12-293
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
ParSet 1..4 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a
particular function is active.
Delay Delay from the instant the function picks up to the
generation of a tripping command.
U/f-Setting Setting of the voltage/frequency ratio for tripping.
Max / Min defines operation as overfluxing or underfluxing.
Settings:
Max: Overfluxing
Min: Underfluxing
Voltage input defines the voltage VT input.
All voltage inputs may be specified.
Blocking Input for blocking the operation of the function.
Always off : - not used
Always on : - operation always blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection
functions)
TRIP Output for signaling tripping.
Pick-up Output for signaling pick-up.
12-294
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Settings:
Magnetic flux U/f-Setting
Delay Delay
Over-/underfluxing Max / Min
Typical settings:
U/f-Setting 1.1 UN/fN
Delay 5s
Max / Min Max
12-295
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12.24.1. Application
Protection of power transformers against excessive flux,
especially in heavily loaded non-laminated metal parts, and the
associated excessive heating of the unit.
12.24.2. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio
Single-phase measurement
Inverse time delay according to U/f ratio
Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector
Insensitive to DC components
Insensitive to harmonics
Delay determined by integrating function response
Input of delay table facilitates matching the operating
characteristic to a specific machine according to IEEE
Guideline
C 37.91-1985
12.24.3.4. Measurements
Voltage/frequency
Frequency
12-296
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12-297
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
Blocking Input for blocking the operation of the function.
Always off : - not used
Always on : - operation always blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection
functions)
TRIP Output for signaling tripping.
Pick-up Output for signaling pick-up.
Settings:
Magnetic flux for enabling char. U/f-Setting
Reference value UB-Setting
Minimum operating time t-Min
Maximum operating time t-Max
10 values defining the inverse t[U/f = 1.05] ... t[U/f = 1.50]
time operating characteristic
12-298
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
UN2
UB = UTN
UN1
Typical settings:
U/f-Setting 1.1 UB/fN
UB-Setting according to protected unit
t-min 0.2 min
t-max 60 min
t [U/f = 1.05...1.50] according to protected unit
12-299
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
140
135
125
A
120
B
115
110 110%
105 105%
continuous
100
.1 .2 .5 1.0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200
t [min]
HEST 935 004 FL
ANWENDUNGEN
POWER FR LEISTUNGSTRANSFORMATOREN
TRANSFORMER (IEEE C37.91-1985)
APPLICATIONS (IEEE C37.91-1985)
150
140
1
2
% 130
V
VOLTS/Hz [%]
O
L
T 120
/
H
z
110
100
CONSULT THE INDIVIDUAL
EINZELNE FABRIKANTEN MANUFACTURERS
MSSEN WITH
BEZGLICH BER-
RESPECT TO OVERFLUXING
ERREGUNGSGRENZEN LIMITS
KONSULTIERT WERDEN
90
0.01 0.1 1.0 10 100 1000
MINUTEN
MINUTES
HEST 935 025 C
12-300
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
12.25.1. Application
Power function for monitoring:
reverse power
active power
reactive power
power direction
12.25.2. Features
Definite time delay
Over- or underpower
Adjustable characteristic angle
Provision for correction of phase errors caused by the input
circuit
One or three-phase measurement
Wide range of applications (see Fig. 12.98 and Fig. 12.99)
Correction of CT and VT phase errors
Insensitive to DC components in voltage and current
Insensitive to harmonics in voltage and current
12.25.3. Inputs and outputs
12.25.3.4. Measurements
Power
12-301
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
12-302
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Text Explanation
Reset ratio Reset value in relation to the pick-up value.
Depending on the sign of the pick-up value, the setting of
the reset ratio must be greater or less than 100 %.
Inadmissible settings :
Reset ratio > 100 % for Max and P-Setting >0
Reset ratio < 100 % for Min and P-Setting >0
Reset ratio > 100 % for Min and P-Setting <0
A large hysteresis must be selected for low pick-up settings
and a small one for high pick-up settings (see Fig. 12.1).
Inadmissible hysteresis settings (=100% - reset ratio):
0.5 % / (P-Setting/PN + 0.01) (upper limit)
10% / P-Setting/PN (lower limit)
These conditions are fulfilled by setting, for example:
P - Setting
for from 0.2 to 1, i.e. 95 %
PN
and
P - Setting
for from 0.02 to 0.2, i.e. 60 %
PN
Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. The time
the function takes to reset is also influenced by the delay
set for operation, i.e.:
for t > 100 ms, the function resets after 50 ms, otherwise
resetting is instantaneous.
Max / Min defines the operating mode as:
Max: overpower
Min: underpower
Caution:
The number and its sign are relevant and not just the value,
i.e. Min must be set for reverse power, because tripping
takes place for a power less than zero (P Setting < 0).
Power factor Input of an angle to compensate CT and VT errors in the
com. (Phi) case of highly accurate power measurements.
The setting is determined by the difference between CT
and VT errors.
PN Rated power as given by UN x IN. This enables the
amplitude of the power being measured to be
compensated, e.g. to the rated power factor of a generator.
12-303
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Text Explanation
Number of Number of phases measured:
phases
single-phase measurement
three-phase measurement
P = UR IR cos + US IS cos + UT IT cos
(with Y-connected VTs)
P = URS IR cos + UST IS cos + UTR IT cos
(The measurement is only correct with delta-connected
VTs providing the three voltages are symmetrical.)
Current input defines the CT input.
All inputs may be selected.
In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel
of the group of three (R phase) must be selected.
Voltage input defines the VT input.
All inputs may be selected.
In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel
of the group of three (R phase) must be selected.
Blocking Input for an external function to block the function.
Always off: - not used
Always on: - operation always blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection
functions)
TRIP Signals tripping
Pick-up Signals pick-up
12-304
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
1
Reset ratio 95%
Reset ratio
60%
0.5
Settings:
Reference power PN
Setting P - Setting
Reset ratio Reset ratio
Over-/underpower Max / Min
Characteristic angle Angle
Phase error compensation Phi compensation
Tripping delay Delay
The power function can be used for many applications. Some
examples are given in Fig. 12.98 and Fig. 12.99. The angles
given apply for connection according to the diagram in the
appendix.
12-305
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Q Q
0 P 0 P
12-306
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
Q Q
Operates Restrains Operates
Restrains
0 P 0 P
Q
Restrains
0 60
P
Operates
- P-Setting <0
- Max/Min MIN
- Drop-Ratio <100%
- Angle 60 (90 ) *)
HEST 965 018 C
12-307
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
where:
SGN, PGN, UGN, IGN, cosGN: ratings of the protected unit
UN1, IN1: primary VT and CT ratings
PN, UN, IN: protection ratings
Example 1
Transformer: 96 MVA, 13.8 kV, 4 kA, cos = 0.8
Power factor: cos = 0.8
14.4 100
VTs / CTs: kV / V; 5 kA / 5 A
3 3
Protection: 100 V; 5 A
Reverse power: 0.5 % PGN
Alternative 1: No adjustment of PN
Settings:
PN
Reference power: = 1 .0
UN IN
Reverse power:
P U I 13.8 4
= 0.005 GN GN cos GN = 0.005 0.8 = 0.003
PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
12-308
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
P U I 13.8 4
Reverse power: = 0.005 GN GN = 0.005 = 0.004
PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
P
Reverse power: = 0.005
PN
Characteristic angle
The power function is connected to the phase currents and a
phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage. The purpose of the
phase compensation is twofold:
to compensate the phase difference between the phase
voltage and the any measured phase-to-phase voltage
to determine whether the function responds to active or
reactive power
The following table summarizes the most important operating
modes to simplify setting the corresponding parameters correctly.
The angles given apply for connection according to the diagram
in the appendix.
The phase compensation also provides facility for changing the
direction of measurement or to compensate incorrect VT or CT
polarity.
12-309
Function "MaxMi n" "Dro p-Ra ti o" "P-Setting " "Ang le" * )
max Max
12-310
< 10 0%
Fig. 12.100
min Min > 10 0%
ABB Switzerland Ltd
voltage URS
max Max < 10 0%
Indu cti ve
rea cti ve p owe r >0 +1 20
Phase compensation
This setting is for correcting the phase error between the VTs
and CTs which have a considerable adverse influence on the
measurement of active power at low power factors.
Example 2
The active power error at rated current and a power factor of
cos = 0 for a total phase error of 10' is
P = 0.03 = 0.03 10 = 0.3 % [%; 1; min]
This is an error is not negligible at a setting of 0.5 %.
The total error corresponds to the difference between the VT and
CT errors. The case considered in this example of full reactive
current (100%) would scarcely occur in practice, but reactive
current components from about 80% are possible.
NOTE:
The following must be set for a 'Minimum forward power' scheme
according to Anglo-Saxon practice:
P Setting >0
MaxMin Min
Reset ratio 150 %
12-311
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
13. APPENDICES
13-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
13. APPENDICES
13.1. Glossary
Terms and Meaning
abbreviations
Phase shift (phase comparison)
max Tripping phase shift (phase comparison)
A Output
ALG_ General signal
ASIC Application specific integrated circuit
Backplane PCB or panel at the rear of an electronic
equipment rack with the connectors
between the modules.
BB Busbar
BB zone Section of busbar bounded by circuit-
breakers which can be isolated by the
protection
BBP Busbar protection
BBP_ Busbar protection signal
BFP Breaker failure protection
BFP_ Breaker failure protection signal
BP Bay protection
This includes all the functions that do
not form part of the station protection,
e.g. distance protection, directional
overcurrent etc.
The bay protection functions are
described in Chapter 12.
BPD Breaker pole discrepancy protection
BU Bay Unit
Bus board PCB interconnecting plug-in modules
Bus segment Independently operating section of the
process bus with its own CPU.
COMTRADE Data format for disturbance recorder
according to IEEE C 37.111
13-2
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
13-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
13-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
13-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
13-6
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
13-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
L1 L2 L3
+U
Batt.
Q0
Close command
-U Batt.
T1
Bay unit
-U Batt.
HEST 005049 C
13-8
L1 L1
I L2 L2 I
L3 L3
L1 L1
II L2 L2 II
L3 L3
+U
Batt.
Fig. 13.2
-T1
current transformers face the
circuit breaker.
Then the C.T. connections to the bay
unit must be reversed
GND
L1 L2 L3 Q1 Q2
See CB-Image
See CB-Image
L1 L2 L3
-T1
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
Bay unit
Feeder
-F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 -F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 -F391 A1 A2 A5 A6 -F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12
1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N
HEST 005046 C
OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04
IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0 IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0 IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0
13-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
25A 10A
Central unit
1 Power supply (2)
+ Battery Battery +
B1 B2
- 10A -
Bay unit
1 BU1 (2)
Power supply
1 BU2 (2)
1 BU3 (2)
1 BU4 (2)
Upto 6 BU's
10A
Next 6 BU's
Isolator image
BU1
If B1 fails during operation, then the
last isolator image will be valid as
long as the image does not change.
Isolator image
BU2
HEST 005048 C
13-10
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
+ Battery Battery +
B1 B2
- 4A -
Bay unit
1 Bu1 (2)
Power supply
Other
Protection
4A
BU2 (2)
1
Power supply
4A
BU3
1 (2)
Power supply
BU4
1 (2)
Power supply
Other BU's
Isolator image
BU1
If B1 fails during operation the isolator
image last know will be valid as
long as the image does not change
Isolator image
BU2
HEST 005047 C
13-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
13-12
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB
Switzerland Ltd; 2006. Fr dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegenstand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfltigungen, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines
Inhalts sind ohne unsere ausdrckliche Zustimmung verboten. ABB Schweiz AG; 2006.
Purchaser / Auftraggeber :
Installation / Anlage :
/ PSAT4 2006-mm-dd
SSS Sammelschienenschutz
SVS Schalterversagerschutz
EFS Endfehlerschutz
SPD Schalterpol-Diskrepanzschutz
UMZ Ueberstromzeitschutz
BAL Betriebsanleitung
6.5.1. Dielectric tests carried out in other test departments, according to IEC 60255-5, (2000):
Dielectric test of the protection cubicle, according to enclosed test record .....................................
Hochspannungsprfung des Schutzschrankes gemss beiliegendem Protokoll
Dielectric tests carried out by Enics Ltd according to enclosed Specific test report
Hochspannungstests durchgefhrt durch Enics AG gemss beiliegendem Werkprfzeugnis
6.6.1 Test of protective ground, according to IEC 60204-1, test record enclosed ..................................
Schutzleiterprfung, gemss IEC 60204-1, Prfprotokoll beiliegend
6.7. Test of lighting, heating, door switch / Prfung von Beleuchtung, Heizung, Trschalter.................
Die Funktionsprfungen wurden gemss Prfanweisung REB500 / REB500sys durchgefhrt. Die Prfungen sind
auf den untenstehend aufgelisteten Beilagen dokumentiert.
8. Enclosures / Beilagen
Nr. Beilage Anz. Seiten Bemerkung
No. Enclosure No. of pages Remark
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Configuration / Konfiguration:
Functions configured / Konfigurierte Funktionen:
Busbar protection BBP / Sammelschienenschutz SSS.........................................................................................
L0 measurement / L0-Messung.............................................................................................................................
Check zone protection / Checkzonenschutz .........................................................................................................
Overcurrent release / berstromfreigabe..............................................................................................................
Undervoltage release / Unterspannungsfreigabe..................................................................................................
Overvoltage release / Ueberspannungsfreigabe...................................................................................................
Breaker failure protection BFP / Schalterversagerschutz SVS .............................................................................
End fault protection EFP / Endfehlerschutz EFS...................................................................................................
Time-overcurrent protection OCDT / berstromzeitschutz UMZ ..........................................................................
CB pole discrepancy function PDF / Schalterpol-Diskrepanz-Schutz SPD ..........................................................
Disturbance recorder DRR / Strschreiber STS ...................................................................................................
Interface - IBB protocol................................................... LON IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 60870-5-103
Bay protection functions / Abgangsschutz-Funktionen .........................................................................................
-/-............................................................................................................................................................................
Software versions / Softwareversionen:
REBWIN (MMI) ................................................................................................................................................
REBCON (Config.-SW) ...................................................................................................................................
REBSYS (Firmware) ........................................................................................... ...........................................
SiMon (Base-SW) ............................................................................................... .......... ............
CPU BIO BU03
BB configuration / SS-Konfiguration:
Number of buses / Anzahl Schienen .........................................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Number of feeders / Anzahl Abgnge .......................................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Number of section isolators / Anzahl Lngstrenner ..................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Number of coupler 0ct / Anzahl Kupplungen 0ct .......................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Number of coupler 1ct / Anzahl Kupplungen 1ct .......................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Number of coupler 2ct / Anzahl Kupplungen 2ct .......................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Diameter ....................................................................................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
REB500 setting / REB500 Aufstellung ................................................................... .........................................
Centralised / Zentral Decentralised / Dezentral
Grounding / Erdung .................................................................................................................................................
Setfile /Konfigurationsdatei:
Name / Name........................................................................................................................................... .mdb
CU=Central Unit ZE=Zentraleinheit BU=Bay Unit FE= Feldeinheit BB=Busbar SS=Sammelschiene
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Delay / Verzgerung..............................................................................................................................................
configured and tested
Logic / Logik...........................................................................................................................................................
configured and tested
Testing of pick-up and drop off voltage of optical coupler inputs ( 80% / 60% ) ...................................................
Prfen der Anzug- und Abfallspannung der Optokopplereingnge ( 80% / 60% ) tested
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Intertripping / Mitnahme:
Busbar Ref. feeder Feeder / Coupler Internal fault External fault Remark
sect. Ref. Abgang Abgang / Kupplung Fehler intern Fehler extern Bemerkung
Schienenteil
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
BB1
Description of diagram / Diagrammbeschreibung
BB2: ............
Feeder 1: ....
Coupler
Feeder 2: ....
Feeder1 Feeder2
Coupler: ......
Fault
Description of diagram / Diagrammbeschreibung
BB1
BB2
BB1: ............
BB2: ............
Feeder 1: ....
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Active for circuit breaker open / Aktiv bei geffnetem Schalter...................................................................... yes / ja
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Ext. CzBBP bypass from the Central Unit / Ext. CzSSS-berbrckung von der Central Einheit .........................
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
Ext. CzBBP bypass from the Bay Units / Ext. CzSSS-berbrckung von der Feldeinheit..................................
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
For further explanation see also enclosure checkzone protection function (CzBBP) picture 1.
Fr weitere Erklrungen siehe auch Beilage Checkzonenschutzfunktion (CzSSS) Bild 1
Ref. feeder Feeder used by CzBBP Internal fault External fault Remark
Ref. Abgang Abgang gebraucht bei CzSSS Fehler intern Fehler extern Bemerkung
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Settings / Einstellungen
Trip condition
Release criterion / Freigabe Kriterien
Auslsebedingungen
External release U AND external U OR external Release
U only
input only release input release input corresponding
BU function
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Configured / Konfiguriert........................................................................................................................................
Settings / Einstellungen
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Sync. method:
Clock with warning ........ VATS bit pattern -based........ VATS pulse-based ........
Remark / Bemerkung:
REB500sys
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite: 1/5
I O/C 0 0 0 0 (In)
Delay O/C 5 5 5 5 (s)
Time PS Block 3 3 3 3 (s)
Start Mode UZ UZ UZ UZ
Phase Sel Mode Solid Ground Solid Ground Solid Ground Solid Ground
I Start 4 4 4 4 (In)
I Min 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 (In)
3Io Min 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 (In)
3 Uo Min 0 0 0 0 (Un)
Starting
Parameter
V-Setting 0.2 (Un)
I-Setting 0.1 (In)
Angle 60 (Deg)
t Basic 0.2 (s)
t Wait 0.05 (s)
t Trans Block 0.1 (s)
CT Neutral Bus Side
Communication Mode Permissive
Send Mode Meas. Fwd
1 channel On
Echo Mode Off
Parameter
Delay 1.0 (s)
I-Setting 2.3 (In)
Max /Min Max (1Ph)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Parameter
c - Setting 1 Very Inverse (BS142)
K1 - Setting 13.5 (In)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
Min. Tripping Time 0 (S)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV)
Parameter
c - Setting 0.02 Normal Inverse (BS142)
K1 - Setting 0.14 (In)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Min. Tripping Time 0 (S)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Parameter
Delay 1.0 (s)
U-Setting 1.2 (Un)
Max / Min Max (1Ph)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Voltage Input Channel VT U1
Parameter
I-Setting 0.2 (In)
Delay 20 (Sec)
CT - Compensation 1
Parameter
I-Setting 2.0 (In)
Angle 45 (Deg) Version 6.xx: -135 Deg
Delay 1.0 (s)
t-Wait 0.2 (s)
Mem Dir Mode Trip
Mem Duration 2 (s)
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Protection for Ungrounded or Compensated Systems (DIREFISOL)
Empfindlicher Erdschluss Richtungs-Schutz fr ungeerdete ode kompensierte Netze
Parameter
P-Setting 0.05 (Pn)
Angle -90 (Deg)
Drop-Ratio 60 (%)
Delay 0.5 (s)
Pn 1 (Un*In
)
Phi-Comp 0 (Deg)
Parameter
1. AR Mode 1P3P - 1P3P
General
2.-4. AR Mode Off
t dead 1P 1.2 (s)
Timers
t dead 3P 0.6 (s)
t dead 1 Ext 1 (s)
t dead 2 1.2 (s)
t dead 3 5.0 (s)
t dead 4 60.0 (s)
t Operation 0.5 (s)
t Inhibit 5.0 (s)
t Close 0.25 (s)
t Discrim 1P 0.6 (s)
t Discrim 3P 0.3 (s)
t Timeout 1 (s)
t AR Block 5.0 (s)
SC Bypass 1P On
Synchrocheck
SC Bypass 1P3P Off
ZE Prefault Off
Zone Extension
ZE 1. AR - ZE 4. AR Off
Master Follower Logic Master Mode Off
Binary Input CO Ready True
Parameter
Max. Volt Diff 0.2 (Un)
General Parameters
Max. Phase Diff 10 (Deg)
Max. Frequency Diff 0.2 (Hz)
Minimum Voltage 0.7 (Un)
Maximum Voltage 0.3 (Un)
Operation Mode Synchck only
Supervising Time 0.2 (s)
t - Reset 0.05 (s)
Voltage Busbar Input Phase 1 Ph R-S
Analog Input
Voltage Line Input Phase 3 Ph Star
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Feeder / Abgang
Sensitive Earth Fault for grounded networks / Empf. Erdschlussrichtungsschutz geerd. Netze (DIREFGND)...
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
Sensitive Earth Fault for isol. networks / Empf. Erdschlussrichtungsschutz isol. Netze (DIREFISOL) ..............
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
InverseTime Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (I0INV) ..............
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter gerichteteter Ueberstromschutz (DIROCINV) ...
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
Distance Status:
Under Impedance Starting
|Fault Type |Angle |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Deg |Ohm |Ohm |% |% | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L2 | 90 | | | | | |
|L3-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L1-L2 | 90 | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | 90 | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | 90 | | | | | |
Char. Angle
|Fault Type |Nom.Value |Meas.Value |Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Deg |Deg |Deg |Deg | |
|Earth Fault| | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Autoreclosure Status:
| |Fault Type|Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |
| | |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|Pause 1Ph |L1-E | | | | | |
|Pause 3Ph |L1-L2 | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Synchrocheck Status:
| Test Condition |Fault Type| Expected Function | Status |
| 8 Deg Phase Diff |L1-L2 | Synchrocheck permits Autoreclosure | |
|12 Deg Phase Diff |L1-L2 | Synchrocheck blocks Autoreclosure | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Char. Angle
|Fault Type |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Deg |Deg |Deg |Deg | |
| | | | | | |
REB500sys
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite: 1/2
Variant / Variante:
T-V1
Transformer Differential Protection DIFTRA X
Thermal Overload THF X
Peak Overcurrent Protection OCINST X
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection OCDT X
InverseTime Overcurrent Protection OCINV X
InverseTime Earth Fault Overcurrent IOINV X
Three Phase Current Plausability CHKI3PH X
Logic LOGIC X
Delay DELAY X
Option
Parameter
g-Setting 0.2 (In)
v-Setting 0.5
b-Setting 1.5 (In)
g-High 2.0 (In)
I-Inst 10 (In)
Inrush Ratio 10 (%)
Inrush Time 5 (s)
a1 1
s1 Y
a2 1
s2 y0
a3 1
s3 d1
Parameter
Theta Begin 100 (%)
Theta Warning 105 (%)
Theta Trip 110 (%)
Ib-Setting 1.0 (In)
Time Constant 5 (Min)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Parameter
Delay 0.01 (s)
I-Setting 4 (In)
Min. Frequency 40 (Hz)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Parameter
Delay 1.0 (s)
I-Setting 2.3 (In)
Max /Min Max (1Ph)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Parameter
c - Setting 1 Very Inverse (BS142)
K1 - Setting 13.5 (In)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
Min. Tripping Time 0 (S)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV)
Parameter
c - Setting 0.02 Normal Inverse (BS142)
K1 - Setting 0.14 (In)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Min. Tripping Time 0 (S)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Parameter
I-Setting 0.2 (In)
Delay 20 (Sec)
CT - Compensation 1
REB500sys
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/2
Feeder / Abgang
A-Side / Seite A
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV).............
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
B-Side / Seite B
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV).............
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
C-Side / Seite-C
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV).............
configured and tested
konfiguriert und geprft
Common / Gemeinsam
Logic / Logik...........................................................................................................................................................
konfiguriert und geprft
configured and tested
Remark / Bemerkung:
Stability Test
External 3-Ph fault, Side A - B: No trip Status:
Internal 3-Ph fault, Side A - B: Trip Status:
External 3-Ph fault, Side A - C: No trip Status:
Internal 3-Ph fault, Side A - C: Trip Status:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Endkunde :
Anlage :
Auftraggeber :
ABB Bestell-Nr. :
Geprft: Prfdatum:
Visum:
Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll
Abt. PTUSX
Sprache Seite
1
ABB ABB Schweiz AG DE
2005-08
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Checkliste
Trennerhilfskontakte (Trennerabbild)
Schalterhilfskontakte / Hand-Ein
Integrierter Schalterreserveschutz
Richtungskontrolle Distanzschutz
Stabilittskontrolle Sammelschienenschutz
Stabilittskontrolle Trafodifferenzialschutz
Systemzeit setzen
Schlusskontrolle
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Allgemeine Angaben
Softwareversionen ...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
Setfile (MDB-File) ...................................................................................
Gemessene Spannungen:
EIN Hilfskontakt
(Schliesser) Bemerkungen:
....................................................................................
AUS Hilfskontakt
(ffner) ....................................................................................
....................................................................................
Hilfskontakt muss geschlossen sein
....................................................................................
Hilfskontakt kann geschlossen sein ....................................................................................
Hilfskontakt muss offen sein ....................................................................................
....................................................................................
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
OC01 ..................................................................................................
1
OC01
2 OC02 ..................................................................................................
OC02
3 OC03 ..................................................................................................
OC03
4
OC04 5 OC04 ..................................................................................................
6
7
OC05 OC05 ..................................................................................................
8
OC06
9 OC06 ..................................................................................................
OC07
10 OC07 ..................................................................................................
OC08 11
12
13 OC08 ..................................................................................................
OC09
14
OC10 OC09 ..................................................................................................
15
OC11
16 OC10 ...................................................................................................
OC12 17
18
OC11 ..................................................................................................
OC12 ..................................................................................................
1 CR01 ..................................................................................................
2
CR01 3 CR02 ..................................................................................................
CR02 4
CR03 5 CR03 ..................................................................................................
6
CR04 7
CR04 ..................................................................................................
8
9
CR05 ..................................................................................................
CR05 10
11
12
CR06 ..................................................................................................
CR06 13
14 CR07 ..................................................................................................
15
CR07 16 CR08 ..................................................................................................
CR08 17
CR09 18 CR09 ..................................................................................................
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Feldeinheit 500BU03
Abgang ..
A 1
OC01
OC01 ..................................................................................................
2
3
OC02 OC02 ..................................................................................................
5
OC03 OC03 ..................................................................................................
6
OC04
7 OC04 ..................................................................................................
8
9
OC05 OC05 ..................................................................................................
10
OC06
11 OC06 ..................................................................................................
12
13
OC07
OC07 ..................................................................................................
14
OC08
15
OC08 ..................................................................................................
16
17
OC09
18 OC09 ..................................................................................................
B 1
OC10 OC10 ...................................................................................................
2
OC11
OC11 ..................................................................................................
3
OC12
4
OC12 ..................................................................................................
5
6
OC13 OC13 ..................................................................................................
7
OC14
OC14 ..................................................................................................
8
OC15
9 OC15 ..................................................................................................
10
11
OC16 OC16 ...................................................................................................
12
OC17
OC17 ...................................................................................................
13
OC18
14
OC18 ...................................................................................................
15
16
OC19
OC19 ...................................................................................................
17
OC20
18 OC20 ...................................................................................................
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Feldeinheit 500BU03
Abgang ..
1 C
CR01 2
CR01 ..................................................................................................
3
CR03 8
CR03 ..................................................................................................
9
10
CR04 CR04 ..................................................................................................
11
CR05 12 CR05 ..................................................................................................
13
CR06
14 CR06 ..................................................................................................
CR07 15
CR07 ..................................................................................................
1 D
2
CR08 ..................................................................................................
CR08 3
CR09
4
CR09 ..................................................................................................
CR10
5 CR10 ..................................................................................................
6
7 CR11 ..................................................................................................
CR11 8
CR12
9 CR12 ..................................................................................................
CR13 10
CR13 ..................................................................................................
11
12
CR14 ..................................................................................................
CR14 13
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Bemerkungen:
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Bemerkungen:
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Abgangsschutz (Leitungsschutz)
Abgang ..
Primre Leitungsdaten
Lnge ..................... km
Mitimpedanz ..................... /Ph Winkel ....................
Nullimpedanz ..................... /Ph Winkel ....................
Sekundreinspeisung
Synchrocheckfunktion
Parallele Einspeisung (1phasig) von "uEingLeitung" und "uEingSchien1" bzw. "uEingSchien2"
"uEingLeitung" parallel "uEingSchien1" "uEingLeitung" parallel "uEingSchien2"
Differenzspannung Differenzwinkel Differenzspannung Differenzwinkel
Spg. Usoll Uist * soll ist * Usoll Uist * soll ist *
[V] [UN] [UN] [Grad] [Grad] [UN] [UN] [Grad] [Grad]
* Aus Men "Ansicht AS Funktions Monitoring" ablesen; Synchrocheckfunktion muss aktiv sein
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Abgangsschutz (Trafoschutz)
Abgang ..
Primrwandler-bersetzungen
Analogeingnge I1 - I3 ...................../................... A/A
Analogeingnge I4 - I6 ...................../................... A/A
Analogeingnge I7 - I9 ...................../................... A/A
Sekundreinspeisung
Differentialfunktion
Messen der Grundeinstellung g
Primrwicklung OS (A) Sekundrwicklung US (B) Tertirwicklung TS (C)
Phase Sollwert [A]* Messwert [A] Sollwert [A]* Messwert [A] Sollwert [A]* Messwert [A]
L1
L2
L3
* Sollwert bei einphasiger Einspeisung = g * (1/a) * IN * k
k = 3 fr Sternschaltung; k = 1 fr Dreieckschaltung; k = 1.5 fr Zickzackschaltung
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
Notification Form for Errors in this Document
Dear User,
We are always endeavoring to improve the quality of our technical publications and
would like to hear your suggestions and comments. Would you therefore please fill in
this questionnaire and return it to the address given below.
Have you discovered any mistakes in this publication? If so, please note here the
pages, sections etc.
Do you find the publication readily understandable and logically structured? Can you
make any suggestions to improve it?
Is the information sufficient for the purpose of the publication? If not, what is missing
and where should it be included?
Name: Date:
Company:
Dear User,
Should you be obliged to call on our repair service, we kindly as you to attach a note
to the unit describing the fault as precisely as possible. This will assist us to carry out
the repair swiftly and reliably and you will gain the benefit.
Please attach a completed form to every unit and forward them to the address below.
Equipment data:
Unit type:
Serial No.: HE ..................................
In operation since:
Overfunction
No function
Outside tolerance
Abnormal operating temperature
Sporadic error
Unit for checking
Remarks/Description of fault:
Customer: Date:
Address:
Dear User,
It is common experience that software does not always function as expected for all
applications. A precise description of the problem and observations will help us to
improve and maintain the software to your benefit. Please complete this form and
send it together with any supporting information or documents to the address below.
REB500sys SW version:
Description of problem:
Customer: Date:
Address:
www.abb.com/substationautomation